2011 CIVIC SEDAN

2011 CIVIC SEDANOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

P/N 00X31-SNA-© 20 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved10 6500

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Civic 4-door. You may find descriptionsof equipment and features that are not onyour particular model.

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

Images throughout this owner’s manual(including the front cover) representfeatures and equipment that are available onsome, but not all, models. Your particularmodel may not have some of these features.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SNAC50

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

10/06/23 13:47:54 31SNA650_001

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown inthe instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while itpreserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep inmind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the manysystems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfactionand will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Honda Civic was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

TM

10/06/23 13:48:01 31SNA650_002

－

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention ActThe airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials specialhandling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

10/06/23 13:48:07 31SNA650_003

－

－

－－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

10/06/23 13:48:19 31SNA650_004

10/06/23 13:48:22 31SNA650_005

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

(heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 55

.......................................Features . 109

.......................................................................Before Driving . 237

.........................................................................................Driving . 253

.................................................Maintenance . 279

..............................................Technical Information . 351

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 369

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 373

........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 327

IND

EX

1

10/06/23 13:48:34 31SNA650_006

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

The Maintenance Minder showsyou when you need to take yourvehicle to the dealer for maintenanceservice. There is also a list of thingsto check and instructions on how tocheck them.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Technical Information

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information SummaryTaking Care of the Unexpected

Maintenance

Overview of Contents

2

TM

10/06/23 13:48:56 31SNA650_007

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

3

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

AUDIO SYSTEMMOONROOF SWITCH

DOOR LOCK TAB

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

(P.102)

(P.100)

(P.9, 24)

(P.205)

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

(P.114)INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS(P.57)GAUGES

MIRROR CONTROLS(P.104)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.101)

(P.66)

(P.82)

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE(P.239)TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE(P.88)

(P.9, 30)

(P.110)

(P.81)

(P.108)

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(P.260)MANUAL TRANSMISSION(P.257)

10/06/23 13:49:05 31SNA650_008

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :4 :

Si model

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS


HORN CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

HEATED MIRRORS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS BUTTONS

DISPLAY CHANGEBUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

SEL/RESET BUTTON

(P.75)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.77)

(P.76)

(P.76)

(P.30)

(P.72)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.73)FOG LIGHTS (P.74)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) OFF SWITCH (P.269)

(P.204)

(P.212)

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P.240)

(P.209)

(P.104)

1 2

2

2

3

4

2

4

10/06/23 13:49:14 31SNA650_009

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 21......Airbag System Components . 21

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 29..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 31...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 33

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 33

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 34

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 34

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 36

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 36

...Additional Safety Precautions . 37Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.........Protecting Small Children . 39.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40....................Installing a Child Seat . 41

...............................With LATCH . 42.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44

..............................With a Tether . 45...........Protecting Larger Children . 47

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 47..................Using a Booster Seat . 48

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 49

...Additional Safety Precautions . 50.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51

...................................Safety Labels . 52

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

5

10/06/23 13:49:18 31SNA650_010

－You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat

(see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Engaging in mobile phoneconversation or other activities thatkeep you from paying close attention

to the road, other vehicles andpedestrians could lead to a crash.Remember, situations can changequickly, and only you can decidewhen it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.14

33 50

281

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving Safely

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

6

10/06/23 13:49:33 31SNA650_011

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(4)

(6)

(10)

(2)

(11)(11)

(4)(6) (3)

(8)

(7)

(5)

(2) (1)

(9)

(7)

(12)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(12) Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensors

10/06/23 13:49:42 31SNA650_012

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces and territoriesrequire you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

10/06/23 13:49:56 31SNA650_013

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

27

2924

CONTINUED

Airbags

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

10/06/23 13:50:05 31SNA650_014

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearcollisions, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.


10

10/06/23 13:50:13 31SNA650_015

－

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door-open indicator on the

instrument panel to indicate whenany door is open.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the door-open indicator works.

Some models have the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .

33 37

8161

83

CONTINUED

Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

10/06/23 13:50:26 31SNA650_016

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).77

93

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults and Teens

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

10/06/23 13:50:36 31SNA650_017

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.Have passengers adjust their head

restraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

93

94


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

10/06/23 13:50:47 31SNA650_018

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

10/06/23 13:50:55 31SNA650_019

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

18

CONTINUED


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

RELEASE BUTTON

10/06/23 13:51:07 31SNA650_020

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

10/06/23 13:51:16 31SNA650_021

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

10/06/23 13:51:25 31SNA650_022

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

18

10/06/23 13:51:37 31SNA650_023

CONTINUED

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

14


Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

10/06/23 13:51:49 31SNA650_024

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

The tensioners can be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

If the tensioner is activated, the SRSindicator comes on and the tensionermust be replaced.

309

HondaWarranty Information

do not deploy


Seat Belt Maintenance

20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

10/06/23 13:51:58 31SNA650_025

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

(9)

(1)

(3)

(14)

(4)

(6)

(11)

(14)(10)

(13)

(8)

(15)

(12)(7)

(5)(4)

(13)

(16)(4)

(5)

(8) (2)

(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator(16) Safing Sensor

(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS)

Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/

OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(14) Side Curtain Airbags

10/06/23 13:52:07 31SNA650_026

Sensors that can detect whethera child is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal thecontrol unit to turn the airbagoff (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and thefront passenger’s seat belt arelatched or unlatched (see page

).

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

28

18

24

27

29

19

Additional Information About Your Airbags

22

10/06/23 13:52:14 31SNA650_027

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbag systemcomponents (see page ).

26

26 29

30

30


riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

10/06/23 13:52:23 31SNA650_028

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

26

How Your Front Airbags Work


24

10/06/23 13:52:32 31SNA650_029

CONTINUED

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-threshold frontairbags (SRS). During a frontal crashsevere enough to cause one or bothfront airbags to deploy, the airbagscan inflate at different rates,depending on the severity of thecrash, whether or not the seat beltsare latched, and/or other factors.Front airbags are designed tosupplement the seat belts to helpreduce the likelihood of head andchest injuries in frontal crashes.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.After inflating, the front airbags

immediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.


Dual-Stage, Multiple-ThresholdFront Airbags (SRS)

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

10/06/23 13:52:40 31SNA650_030

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren or small-statured adults whoride in front.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Objects placed or pushed underthe front passenger’s seat maycause the sensor to malfunction,increasing the risk of injury in acrash.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Advanced Airbags


26

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHT SENSORSDRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR

10/06/23 13:52:51 31SNA650_031

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag offindicator in this situation will notcome on.

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ). Hanging heavy items on the front

passenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Back seat passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under the frontpassenger seat.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is properlypositioned on the floor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the front passenger’s seat and itssensors.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

30

310

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

10/06/23 13:53:03 31SNA650_032

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if positionsensors detect a child has leaned intothe side airbag’s deployment path,the airbag will shut off.

30Side Airbag Cutoff System


28

10/06/23 13:53:14 31SNA650_033

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbagsystem components.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

CONTINUED

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS IndicatorWorks


riverand

Passenger

Safety

29

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

10/06/23 13:53:27 31SNA650_034

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

If you see any of these indications,the airbag system components maynot work properly when you needthem.

60

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works


not mean

not

30

Canada

U.S.

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

10/06/23 13:53:38 31SNA650_035

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

CONTINUED


The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

An airbag ever inflates.

Airbag Service

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

10/06/23 13:53:52 31SNA650_036

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009 in the US, orHonda Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

32

10/06/23 13:54:00 31SNA650_037

－－

－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, trafficcollisions are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

38 4647 50

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

33

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

10/06/23 13:54:09 31SNA650_038

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

According to crash statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

47

26

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children General Guidelines

34

10/06/23 13:54:22 31SNA650_039

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models


riverand

Passenger

Safety

35

Dashboard

Sun Visor

Sun Visor

10/06/23 13:54:38 31SNA650_040

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

47

15

14

93

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Protecting Children General Guidelines

36

10/06/23 13:54:49 31SNA650_041

－

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

If a child wraps a loose

seat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, Canadian provinces andterritories, and can be veryhazardous.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

44 45

8289

Additional Safety Precautions

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.Never hold an infant or child on

your lap.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

10/06/23 13:55:00 31SNA650_042

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

38

10/06/23 13:55:12 31SNA650_043

CONTINUED

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Many states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year ofage or older who also meets theminimum size and weightrequirements to transition from arear-facing child seat to a forwardfacing seat. Know the requirementswhere you are driving and follow thechild seat instructions. Many expertsrecommend use of a rear-facing seatup to age two, if the child’s height

and weight are appropriate for arear-facing seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acrash.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

10/06/23 13:55:24 31SNA650_044

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH) system.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS213 on the box.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

26

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meetFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

1.

40

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

10/06/23 13:55:35 31SNA650_045

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

2.

3.1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

10/06/23 13:55:48 31SNA650_046

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) at the outerrear seats.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

1.

2.

3.


Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

42

LOWER ANCHORS

BUTTON

Rigid type

10/06/23 13:55:58 31SNA650_047

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

6.

5.

4.

7.

95

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

Flexible type

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

10/06/23 13:56:07 31SNA650_048

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


44

10/06/23 13:56:15 31SNA650_049

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

45

ANCHORAGE POINTS

COVER

ANCHOR

10/06/23 13:56:26 31SNA650_050

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

1.

2.

3.44


46

ANCHORCenter PositionOuter Position ANCHOR

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

10/06/23 13:56:35 31SNA650_051

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

10/06/23 13:56:45 31SNA650_052

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces or

territories where you intend to drive.3.

4.

5.40

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

48

10/06/23 13:56:57 31SNA650_053

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

14 47

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

10/06/23 13:57:10 31SNA650_054

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Protecting Larger Children

50

10/06/23 13:57:17 31SNA650_055

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows,and set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a collision thatmay have damaged the underside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

10/06/23 13:57:27 31SNA650_056

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

52

DASHBOARD SUN VISOR

RADIATOR CAP

10/06/23 13:57:45 31SNA650_057

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

DOORJAMBS

10/06/23 13:57:56 31SNA650_058

54

10/06/23 13:57:59 31SNA650_059

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 59.............................................Gauges . 66

..............Display Change Button . 66....................Information Display . 67

..................................Fuel Gauge . 70...................Temperature Gauge . 70

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 71

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 72.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 73

............Daytime Running Lights . 74........................................Fog Lights . 74

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75.................Hazard Warning Button . 76.................Rear Window Defogger . 76

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 77...............................Keys and Locks . 78

........................Immobilizer System . 79................................Ignition Switch . 80

......................................Door Locks . 81......................Power Door Locks . 82

..............Childproof Door Locks . 82.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 83

.....................Auto Door Locking . 83

.................Auto Door Unlocking . 85................................................Trunk . 88

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 89.......................Remote Transmitter . 90

.................................................Seats . 93..................................Seat Heaters . 100

............................Power Windows . 101.......................................Moonroof . 102

...........................................Mirrors . 103...............................Parking Brake . 105...............................Interior Lights . 105

.........Interior Convenience Items . 107.....................Beverage Holders . 108

.........Accessory Power Socket . 108..................................Glove Box . 108

.............Console Compartment . 108

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

55

10/06/23 13:58:04 31SNA650_060

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊ If equipped:

Control Locations

56

(P.102)MOONROOF SWITCH

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(P.260)MANUAL TRANSMISSION

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

(P.101)

(P.88)

(P.114)

(P.239)

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS(P.57)GAUGES(P.66)

MIRROR CONTROLS(P.104)



DOOR LOCK TAB(P.81)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P.110)

(P.108)

(P.257)

(P.205)SEAT HEATER SWITCHES(P.100)

(P.82)

10/06/23 13:58:11 31SNA650_061

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.Canadian DX-G model with M/T has the electric power steering (EPS) indicator (see page 62) next to the immobilizer system indicator.

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

DX, DX-G (Canada), LX (U.S.), LX-S (U.S.), SE (Canada), EX (U.S.), EX-L

57

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

(P. 60) TRUNK-OPENINDICATOR

DOOR-OPENINDICATOR

(P.61)

(P.64)

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

(P.65, 340)

(P.65, 341)

(P.65, 340)

(P.60) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.64)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR(P.62)

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTSINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR(P.62)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATORMAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

(P.59)

(P.64)

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR (P.63)

LOW FUELINDICATOR

(P.63)

(P.59)

(P.60)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.65)

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

(P.61)

(P.61)

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

(P.65, 281)

(P.60)

10/06/23 13:58:19 31SNA650_062

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Si

58

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR(P.63)

(P.61)

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

(P.65, 341)

(P.65)

(P.64)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR(P.60)

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTSINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING(EPS) INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR(P.65, 340)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.61)

(P.61)

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.62)

(P.65, 340) CRUISE MAIN INDICATORMAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR (P.65, 281)

(P.64)

(P.64)

LOW FUELINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

REV LIMIT INDICATOR

TIRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM(TPMS) INDICATOR

(P.59)

(P.61)DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

(P.60)

(P.64)

(P.60)

(P.63)

(P.60)

(P.62)

(P.59)

10/06/23 13:58:29 31SNA650_063

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This indicator reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

1.

2.

18342

Parking Brakeand BrakeSystemIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

U.S. Canada

10/06/23 13:58:41 31SNA650_064

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourairbag system components. Formore information, see page .

30 79

266

29

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

60

U.S. Canada

10/06/23 13:58:53 31SNA650_065

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemwith a circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door and remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

This indicator comes on if the trunklid is not closed tightly.

This indicator comes on if any dooris not closed tightly.

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

73

74

74

304 305

Si model only

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Trunk-open Indicator

Door-open IndicatorFog Light Indicator

Daytime Running LightsIndicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

10/06/23 13:59:08 31SNA650_066

If equipped If equippedThis indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe VSA system. Take your vehicleto a dealer to have it checked.Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal driving ability, but will nothave VSA traction and stabilityenhancement. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place, and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will not turnoff immediately. If it does not go offafter driving a short distance, orcomes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be off, making thevehicle harder to steer.

1.

2.

3.

268

268

268


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Si and Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission models

62

10/06/23 13:59:23 31SNA650_067

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering due to overheating of thesteering gearbox.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .270

329

349

271

U.S. models onlyU.S. models only


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

10/06/23 13:59:34 31SNA650_068

If equipped

If equipped

Canadian models only

Si model only

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

To protect the engine from damage,never drive with the tachometer inits red zone.

This indicator shows you when theengine speed is near the tachometer’sred zone. When the engine speedgets to near the red zone, theindicator blinks. If you exceed themaximum speed for the gear you arein, the indicator stays on, and youmay feel the engine cut in and outdue to the engine speed limiter (seepage ).

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon.

When the needle reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 1.9 US gal (7.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.

259

209

209

297


Low Fuel IndicatorCruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Rev Limit Indicator

64

LOW FUEL INDICATORREV LIMIT INDICATOR

10/06/23 13:59:53 31SNA650_069

See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on theMaintenance Minder .

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

281

208

341

340

340

If equipped


Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Security System IndicatorMaintenance MinderIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65


Si

Except Si

TM

10/06/23 14:00:07 31SNA650_070

Press and hold until the speedometer,trip meter, and odometer readingsswitch between miles per hour andkilometers per hour. A beeper willsound.

Gauges

Display Change Button

66

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

TRIP METER

SPEEDOMETER

FUELGAUGE

SEL/RESET BUTTON DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

INFORMATIONDISPLAY

TACHOMETER

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTONS

U.S. model with A/T is shown.

10/06/23 14:00:15 31SNA650_071

To switch the information displaybetween the odometer, trip meter,outside temperature (if equipped),and engine oil life and maintenanceitem code(s), press the SEL/RESETbutton repeatedly.

This shows the total distance yourvehicle has been driven. It measuresmiles or kilometers.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial and territorialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

CONTINUED

Gauges

Odometer

Information Display

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

U.S. model without outside temperature indicator is shown.

ODOMETER

ODOMETER

TRIP METER A

TRIP METER B

ENGINE OIL LIFE

TRIP METER A

U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.

ENGINE OIL LIFE

OUTSIDETEMPERATUREINDICATOR

TRIP METER B

: Press theSEL/RESETbutton.

: Press theSEL/RESETbutton.

10/06/23 14:00:23 31SNA650_072

± ±

－－－－－－－－

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

There are two trip meters: TRIP Aand TRIP B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the SEL/RESET button repeatedly.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

This meter shows the number ofmiles or kilometers driven since youlast reset it.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Celsius (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSEL/RESET button until thetemperature is shown on theinformation display.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press and hold theSEL/RESET button for 10 seconds.The following sequence will appearfor 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5,

4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When it reaches the desired value,release the SEL/RESET button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

If equipped

Gauges

Trip Meter Outside Temperature Indicator

68

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:00:37 31SNA650_073

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

281

341

Gauges

Check Fuel Cap Message Maintenance Minder

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

TM

10/06/23 14:00:44 31SNA650_074

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, such asvery hot weather or a long period ofuphill driving, the reading may riseinto the upper half of the gauge. If itreaches the red (Hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Seepage for instructions andprecautions on checking the enginecooling system.

338

Gauges

Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge

70

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

10/06/23 14:00:51 31SNA650_075

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :4 :

Si model

Controls Near the Steering WheelInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS


HORN

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

HEATED MIRRORS

DISPLAY CHANGEBUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

SEL/RESET BUTTON

(P.75)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.76)

(P.76)

(P.30)

(P.72)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS (P.73)FOG LIGHTS (P.74)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

(P.77)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) OFF SWITCH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS

(P.269)

(P.204)

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS (P.212)

(P.240)

(P.209)

(P.104)

1

2

2

2

3

2

4

4

10/06/23 14:00:59 31SNA650_076

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－＊

＊

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers operate everyfew seconds. At low speed andhigh speed, the wipers runcontinuously.

The length of the wiper interval isvaried automatically according tothe vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it tothe shortest delay( position), the wiperschange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian SEmodels

OFF

MIST

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

72

ADJUSTMENT RING

: EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, andCanadian SE

10/06/23 14:01:12 31SNA650_077

－－

－

Turn SignalOFFParking and interior lightsHeadlights onHigh BeamsFlash high beams

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click. Thehigh beam indicator will come on(see page ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

61

Turn Signal High Beams

Headlights On

Turn Signals and HeadlightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

10/06/23 14:01:21 31SNA650_078

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when the headlightsare turned off.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

On Si model

Daytime Running Lights Fog Lights

Headlights, Fog Lights

74

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

10/06/23 14:01:29 31SNA650_079

＋－

The buttons under the left side ventcontrol the brightness of theinstrument panel. Push the orbutton to adjust the brightness.

Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

There are six brightness levels.When you push either button, theinformation display indicates thecurrent level. You will hear a tonewhen you reach the maximum orminimum brightness. The displayreturns to the odometer 5 secondsafter you stop adjusting thebrightness.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

The center of each meter (upper andlower) illuminates with reducedbrightness when you unlock andopen the driver’s door, and then goesback to the selected brightness whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

Instrument Panel BrightnessInstrum

entsand

Controls

75

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL BUTTONS

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

10/06/23 14:01:37 31SNA650_080

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .104

On All EX-L, Canadian SE, and Simodels

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button

76

EX-L,CanadianSE, and Si

10/06/23 14:01:47 31SNA650_081

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

4.

2.

3.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

10/06/23 14:01:56 31SNA650_082

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk and trunk releasehandle locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

Keys and Locks

78

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALETKEY(Gray)

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALETKEY(Gray)

MASTERKEY(Black)

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALETKEY(Gray)

DX modelU.S. LX, LX-S, andCanadian DX-G models

EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, andCanadian SE models

10/06/23 14:02:04 31SNA650_083

CONTINUED

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

The keys without a remotetransmitter do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

10/06/23 14:02:18 31SNA650_084

－

－

－－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

80

10/06/23 14:02:28 31SNA650_085

Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. Pull the tab outto lock the door, and push it in tounlock the door.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab out, and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, pull and holdthe outside door handle, then pullthe lock tab out. Release the handle,then close the door.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

On DX models

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

LOCK TAB

To lock

To unlock

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

10/06/23 14:02:37 31SNA650_086

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull outthe lock tab and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch and pullout the lock tab or push the top ofthe master switch, then close thedoor.

The lock tab on the passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks only that door.Pushing in the driver’s door lock tabonly unlocks the driver’s door.To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn it again, alldoors unlock.

With any door open and the key inthe ignition, both master door lockswitches are disabled. They are notdisabled when all the doors areclosed, or when the key is not in theignition.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, push the locktab in, and use the outside doorhandle.

To lock all doors, push the top of themaster door lock switch on eitherfront door, pull out the lock tab onthe driver’s door, or use the key inthe outside lock on the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of either masterdoor lock switch unlocks all doors.

On all models except DX

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

Power Door Locks Childproof Door Locks

82

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

To lock

To unlock

Lock

Unlock

LEVER

10/06/23 14:02:49 31SNA650_087

CONTINUED

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 10 mph (15 km/h).

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

This is the default setting.

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and theparking brake is applied. Make allsettings before you start driving.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

1.

2.

On all models except DX

Door Locks

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

10/06/23 14:03:03 31SNA650_088

Locks all doors when the shift lever ismoved out of the Park (P) position (A/Tvehicles only).

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).


1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

Door Locks

To program the Park Lock mode:

84

10/06/23 14:03:13 31SNA650_089

CONTINUED

The auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:



The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

push and hold thebrake pedal, and move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

the driver’s doorunlocks when you move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position withthe brake pedal depressed.This is the default setting.

All doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to the Park (P)position with the brake pedaldepressed (A/T vehicles).1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speedreaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

Door Locks

To program the Drive Lock mode: Auto Door Unlocking

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

A/T models

10/06/23 14:03:28 31SNA650_090

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.



Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

All doors unlock whenever youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.This is the default setting on M/Tvehicles.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Door Locks

To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

86

10/06/23 14:03:38 31SNA650_091

CONTINUED

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the ignition switch is moved out ofthe ON (II) position.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

all doors unlock feature.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the shift lever is moved into thePark (P) position with the brake pedaldepressed (A/T vehicles only).



Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate



Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Door Locks

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

To program the Park Unlock mode:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

A/T models

10/06/23 14:03:51 31SNA650_092

Even if your vehicle’s battery isremoved or goes dead, the systemkeeps the auto door lock/unlocksetting which you selected.

push and hold thebrake pedal, then move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

To open the trunk, pull the trunkrelease handle on the left side of thedriver’s seat. To protect items in thetrunk when you need to give the keyto someone else, lock the trunkrelease handle with the master key,and give the other person the valetkey.

3.

4.

5.

6.

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

driver’s door unlockfeature.

all doors unlock feature.

Door Locks, Trunk

Trunk

88

MASTER KEY

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

PULL

10/06/23 14:04:02 31SNA650_093

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from inside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever in the direction pointed by anarrow.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging it,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .

37

51

On DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, and CanadianDX-G models


Emergency Trunk Opener

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

TrunkInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

RELEASE LEVER

MASTER KEY

10/06/23 14:04:13 31SNA650_094

－

－

－

－

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once. When you pushLOCK twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a horn to verify that thedoors are locked. You cannot lockthe doors if any door is not fullyclosed or the key is in the ignitionswitch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock. OnU.S. LX, LX-S, EX, EX-L, and Simodels, the security system will alsoset.

If you push the LOCK button twicewithin 5 seconds, you will hear ahorn to verify that the securitysystem has set.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button. Thisbutton does not work when the keyis in the ignition switch.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the door activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open any door, the light stays onfor about 30 seconds, then fades out.If you relock the doors with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the light goesoff immediately.

Press thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

On U.S. LX, LX-S, EX, EX-L, and Simodels


LOCK

UNLOCK

TRUNK RELEASE

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

90

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCK BUTTON

U.S. LX, LX-S, andCanadian DX-G models

EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian SEmodels

10/06/23 14:04:23 31SNA650_095

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Be careful when removingthis screw as the head of the screwcan strip out.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote TransmitterInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

NOTE:

SCREW

10/06/23 14:04:37 31SNA650_096

＋

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.3.

4.

5.




Remote Transmitter

92

TAB

BATTERY

10/06/23 14:04:46 31SNA650_097

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

11 13

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

Front Seat Adjustments

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

93

10/06/23 14:04:54 31SNA650_098

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

13

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from the likelihood ofwhiplash and other injuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Head Restraints

Seats

94

10/06/23 14:05:03 31SNA650_099

CONTINUED

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, thecenter head restraint should beadjusted up or down, to match thepassenger’s height.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

Rear Center PositionFront

RELEASE BUTTONSEAT-BACK

CUSHION

LEGS RELEASE BUTTON

SEAT-BACK

CUSHIONLEG

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

10/06/23 14:05:15 31SNA650_100

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupants

against the likelihood of whiplashand injuries to the neck and upperspine.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

Seats

Active Head Restraints

96

10/06/23 14:05:25 31SNA650_101

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back is released from insidethe trunk.

The seat-back can be folded down asone piece.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to one of its three positions.

On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and CanadianSE models, the rear seat armrest isin the center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

CONTINUED

On DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, and CanadianDX-G models

If equipped

Folding Rear SeatArmrest

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

97

10/06/23 14:05:34 31SNA650_102

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

To release the seat-back, pull therelease under the trunk panel. Pushthe seat-back down, then let go ofthe release.

The left and right seat-backs can befolded separately from inside thetrunk.


Seats

98

GUIDE

CENTER SHOULDER BELTPull RELEASE

10/06/23 14:05:42 31SNA650_103

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not press against the frontpassenger’s seat, as this could causethe weight sensors to workimproperly.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure there are no twists in anyshoulder belt.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

51

249Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

99

10/06/23 14:05:49 31SNA650_104

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use seat heaters.Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seat isonly heated in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag cutoffsystem.

On EX-L model

Seat Heaters

100

Passenger’s Seat

Driver’s Seat SEAT HEATER SWITCHESHEATERS

10/06/23 14:05:58 31SNA650_105

－

－

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically godown or up all the way. To stop the

window, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

Except DX and Canadian DX-G

Except DX and Canadian DX-G

Power Windows

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

10/06/23 14:06:07 31SNA650_106

If equippedTurn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating themoonroof switch on the ceilingconsole.

To open the moonroof fully, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from openingfully, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

To tilt the moonroof, push the centerof the moonroof switch straight up.To stop the moonroof from tiltingfully open, push the moonroof switchforward.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull or push the moonroofswitch lightly to the first detent andhold it. The moonroof will stop whenyou release the switch.

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe moonroof switch forward to thesecond detent, then release it. Themoonroof closes all the way. To stopthe moonroof from closing all theway, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

Moonroof

102

MOONROOF SWITCH

TiltClose

Open

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

10/06/23 14:06:15 31SNA650_107

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Auto Reverse Mirrors

Moonroof, MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

103

TAB

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

10/06/23 14:06:24 31SNA650_108

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

2.

3.

4.

1.

On all models except U.S. DX On All EX-L, Canadian SE and Si models

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors

104

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

10/06/23 14:06:34 31SNA650_109

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON (right), Door Activated,and OFF (left). In the DoorActivated (center) position, the lightcomes on when you:

Open any door.

Unlock the doors with the key orthe remote transmitter.

Remove the key from the ignition.

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).59

CONTINUED

Parking Brake, Interior Lights

Ceiling LightParking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

10/06/23 14:06:45 31SNA650_110

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight(s) dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

If you do not open any door after youunlock the driver’s door or removethe key from the ignition switch, thelight(s) fades out in about 30seconds.

If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light(s) will go off after 3minutes.

The front ceiling light has a two-position switch; Door Activated andOFF.

The front ceiling light has twospotlights. Push the spotlight lensesto turn them on and off.

Push on the spotlight lenses to turnthe light on and off.

On models with moonroof

On models with moonroof

On U.S. LX and LX-S models

Interior Lights

Spotlights

106

OFF

SWITCHES

DOORACTIVATED

10/06/23 14:06:55 31SNA650_111

＊＊

＊

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, push the instrumentpanel brightness control buttonsunder the driver’s side vent with theignition switch in the ON (II)position.

On Canadian Si model

Interior Convenience ItemsCourtesy Light

Interior Lights, Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

107

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

COAT HOOK

GLOVE BOX


BEVERAGEHOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

VANITY MIRRORCOIN BOX

If equipped:

CENTER POCKETCOURTESY LIGHT

10/06/23 14:07:03 31SNA650_112

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). It will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

The EX, EX-L, and Si models withoutnavigation system have anotheraccessory power socket in the centerconsole compartment. When morethan one socket is being used, thecombined power rating of theaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush.

If equipped

Beverage Holders Console Compartment

Accessory Power Socket

Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items

108

LEVER


CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

10/06/23 14:07:16 31SNA650_113

＊

＊

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your vehicle provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

Air conditioning is optional on DXmodel.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 110................................Audio System . 114

Audio System (Models without...............navigation system) . 115

......................Playing the Radio . 116Playing the XM Radio

..............................(Optional) . 120............................Playing a Disc . 125

...Disc Player Error Messages . 131.......................Playing an iPod . 133

.............iPod Error Messages . 140Playing a USB Flash Memory

....................................Device . 141USB Flash Memory Device

....................Error Messages . 148Audio System (Models with

...............navigation system) . 149......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 149

............Playing the XM Radio . 153............................Playing a Disc . 162

...Disc Player Error Messages . 170.....................Playing a PC Card . 171

........PC Card Error Messages . 183.......................Playing an iPod . 184

.............iPod Error Messages . 190

Playing a USB Flash Memory....................................Device . 191

USB Flash Memory Device....................Error Messages . 198

............AM/FM Radio Reception . 199..................Protecting Your Discs . 201................Remote Audio Controls . 204

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 205.................Radio Theft Protection . 206

..........................Setting the Clock . 207............................Security System . 208

...............................Cruise Control . 209........HandsFreeLink . 212Bluetooth

All U.S. models except DX

If equipped

FeaturesF

eatures

109

10/06/23 14:07:25 31SNA650_114

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decreasethem.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

If equipped

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Fan Control Dial

Recirculation Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control Dial

110

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTONS

FAN CONTROL DIAL

MAX A/C BUTTON

(If equipped)

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

(All EX-L,Canadian SEand Si models)

10/06/23 14:07:35 31SNA650_115

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C(if equipped).

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode (see page touse this setting). Air flows from thecenter and side vents in thedashboard. Pressing the , A/C,or any of the mode buttons cancelsMAX A/C, but the A/C stays on.

The ventilation system draws inoutside air, circulates it through theinterior, then exhausts it throughvents near the rear side panels.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.

76

112

If equipped


Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

MAX A/C Button

Ventilation

Features

111

10/06/23 14:07:57 31SNA650_116

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is set

to maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

If the interior is very warm, you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

Turn the fan on.If the A/C is off, turn it on (ifequipped).Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

1.2.3.

3.4.

5.

1.

2.

1.2.

3.

1.2.

3.4.

70

If equipped


Using the Heater

Using the A/C

Dehumidify the Interior

112

10/06/23 14:08:13 31SNA650_117

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C (if equipped).The A/C indicator will not comeon, if it was previously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton twice. The indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

Select . When you select, the system automatically

switches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C (if equipped).The A/C indicator will not comeon, if it was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

5.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.


To Defog and Defrost

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Turn Everything Off

Features

113

10/06/23 14:08:26 31SNA650_118

An audio system is standard on allmodels except the U.S. DX. Read theappropriate pages (as shown below)to use your vehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

If your vehicle has a different audiosystem, refer to its manual foroperating instructions.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .115 148

149 198

Audio System

114

U.S. Si model is shown. U.S. Si model is shown.

U.S. EX, EX-L, and Si modelswith navigation system

EX-L, Si, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX,Canadian DX, DX-G, and SE modelswithout navigation system

10/06/23 14:08:34 31SNA650_119

To change the letter, select theprevious segment by pushing thebottom of the SEEK button.

Turn the TUNE knob to change aletter.

Push the top of the SEEK buttonto select the next segment, thenturn the TUNE knob to select aletter. Repeat this procedure to setyour message.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop selecting a letter.

Your audio system shows a welcomemessage on the display when youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position.

You can also customize this welcomemessage to your liking with theaudio controls.

You can set up to 16 characters onthe display.

To select a character:

Make sure the audio system is off.

Push and hold the TUNE knob,then push the power/volume knobon the audio control panel. Youwill see the first letter blinking.

2.

3.

4.1.

Si model only

Audio System (Models without navigation system)

To Customize a Message

Features

115

TUNE KNOBPOWER/VOLUMEKNOB

SEEK BUTTON

10/06/23 14:08:47 31SNA650_120

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob or theAM/FM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

Playing the Radio


116

SEEK BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

U.S. Si model is shown.

PWR/VOL KNOB

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON

ST INDICATOR

SCANBUTTON

10/06/23 14:08:55 31SNA650_121

－

－

－－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK button, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

Each side of the buttons(1 through 6) can store onefrequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN Preset

Audio System (Models without navigation system)F

eatures

117

10/06/23 14:09:06 31SNA650_122

－

To turn off auto select, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the bass (BAS),treble (TRE), fader (FAD), balance(BAL), and speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the SOUND(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ inthe display. The system willautomatically return the display tothe selected audio mode about 5seconds after you stop adjusting amode.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

Adjusting the SoundAUTO SELECT


118

10/06/23 14:09:14 31SNA650_123

－

－－

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BALANCE adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while FADER adjusts thefront-to-back strength.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

The SVCmode controls the volume based onvehicle speed. The faster you go, thelouder the audio volume becomes.As you slow down, the audio volumedecreases.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the SOUND (TUNE)knob to adjust the setting to yourliking.If you feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Use the TREBLE/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking.

75Balance/Fader

Audio System LightingSpeed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC)

Treble/Bass


eatures

119

10/06/23 14:09:21 31SNA650_124

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

XM is a registered trademark ofSirius XM Radio , Inc.

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Radio anywhere inthe United States, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

Playing the XM Radio


Optional on U.S. EX, EX-L, and Simodels

120

DISPLAY BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

AUX BUTTONSCAN BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON


PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

10/06/23 14:09:28 31SNA650_125

－

－

－

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.Each time you press and release theDISP button, the display changes inthe following sequence: Channelname, channel number, category,artist name, and music title.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP button untilthe mode changes.

Press either side ofthe SEEK/SKIP button ( or

) to select another category.

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the AUX button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob. The last channel you listenedto will show in the display.

CONTINUED

Operating the XM Radio

TUNE

MODE

SEEK/SKIP


eatures

121

10/06/23 14:09:38 31SNA650_126

－

－

－

－

－

－

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset button. Each side of thebutton stores one channel from theXM1 band and one channel from theXM2 band.

To store a channel:

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick a preset number you want forthat channel. Press and hold thebutton until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbutton to tune to it.Press the AUX button. Either XM1

or XM2 will show in the display.

Press the AUX button again. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

SCAN

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’


122

10/06/23 14:09:51 31SNA650_127

－

－

－

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

CONTINUED

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’


eatures

123

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstaclesto the south.

GROUND REPEATER

10/06/23 14:09:59 31SNA650_128

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the PWR/VOLknob to turn on the audio system andpress the AUX button. A variety ofmusic types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.

Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCANADA .

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving XM Radio Service


124

10/06/23 14:10:11 31SNA650_129

CONTINUED

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

Playing a Disc To Play a Disc


eatures

125

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR

DISPLAYBUTTON

CD BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

FOLDER KNOB


SCANBUTTON

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

10/06/23 14:10:21 31SNA650_130

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay.

A disc can support more than 99folders, and each folder can hold upto 255 playable files. When there aremore than 99 folders on a disc, thecenter display only shows two digits.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track andthe elapsed time are shown in thedisplay. When playing a disc in MP3or WMA, the numbers of the currentfolder and file, and the elapsed timeare shown. The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

If a file on WMA disc is protected bydigital rights management (DRM),the audio unit displays CD FORMAT,and then skips to the next file.

Depending on the software the fileswere made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, or displaysome text data.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

To Load a Disc

Text Data Display Function


126

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:10:31 31SNA650_131

－

＞

Use the SEEK/SKIP button while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3/WMAmode).

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP button, the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release the

side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP button.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown. You can see up to 31characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the DISPbutton again, the display shows thefirst 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SEEK/SKIP


eatures

127

10/06/23 14:10:44 31SNA650_132

－

－

－

－

－

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folder

repeat, press the RPT button twice.You will hear a beep and see F-RPTin the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing the RDM button,or selecting a different folder withthe TUNE knob also turns off therepeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press theRDM button for 2 seconds to return

to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press and release the RDM button.You will see F-RDM in the display.The system will then select and playfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing and holding the RDMbutton for 2 seconds, or by selectinga different folder with the TUNEknob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to randomplay (within a disc random play),then to normal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER-REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

FOLDER-RANDOM


128

10/06/23 14:10:54 31SNA650_133

－－

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file in each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the next foldersfor 10 seconds. After playing the firstfile in the last folder, the systemplays normally.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button, selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob, orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the folder scan.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press theSCAN button. In MP3 or WMAmode, press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly to select SCAN. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press and hold theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode and play the last track/filesampled.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button also turns off the scanfeature.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player. Press theAUX button to switch to anappropriate audio unit.

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

To Stop Playing a DiscF-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)


eatures

129

10/06/23 14:11:05 31SNA650_134

－＋

－＋

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 4button (DISC ) or the preset 1button (DISC ). To select theprevious disc, press the preset 4button (DISC ), or the preset 1button (DISC ) to select the nextdisc in sequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

An optional six or eight disc changeris available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio. For information on how to handle

and protect compact discs, see page.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

201

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Protecting Discs


130

10/06/23 14:11:13 31SNA650_135

＊

＊Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

Error Message Cause Solution

: Except Si model

202

High Temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 202 ). Insert the disc again. If thecode does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannotbe removed, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages


eatures

131

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTFORMAT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

10/06/23 14:11:24 31SNA650_136



If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

SolutionError Message Cause

Press the magazine eject button, and pull themagazine out. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Insert disc.

Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, check for an error message, theninsert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Insert disc magazine.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

No disc in the discmagazine

Mechanical Error

No disc magazine inthe disc changerHigh Temperature

Optional Disc Changer ErrorMessages


132

10/06/23 14:11:37 31SNA650_137


Playing an iPod

Features

On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian SE models

133

AUX BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

DISPLAY BUTTON

CD BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON


iPod INDICATOR

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

10/06/23 14:11:42 31SNA650_138

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the discplayer. To play an iPod, connect it tothe USB adapter cable in the consolecompartment by using your dockconnector, then press the AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also becharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

ModeliPod classic(80/160 G)iPod classic(120 G)iPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod nano5th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

SoftwareVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 2.0.1 or more

Ver. 1.3.0 or more

Ver. 1.3.1 or moreVer. 1.1.3 or more

Ver. 1.1.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.1 or more


To Play an iPod


134

10/06/23 14:11:49 31SNA650_139

CONTINUED

Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder and remove the cablefrom the clip in the consolecompartment.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

1.

Connecting an iPod


eatures

135

NOTE:

USB CONNECTORUSB ADAPTERCABLE

10/06/23 14:12:00 31SNA650_140

＞

Each time you press the DISP button,the display mode switches betweenthe album name, the song/trackname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 17characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

2.

3.

www.apple.com/itunes/



136

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

10/06/23 14:12:09 31SNA650_141

－

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press and release the sideof the button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs, by usingthe TUNE/SOUND knob. Push theTUNE/SOUND knob to switch thedisplay to an iPod menu, then turnthe TUNE/SOUND knob to select adesired list.

After making a selection, wait for afew seconds until the display returnsto the previous screen. The iPodmenu is set. Pressing the TUNEknob cancels this setting modebefore returning to the normaldisplay.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SEEK/SKIP button.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

Turn the TUNE knob to select anitem. After making a selection, waitfor a few seconds until the displayreturns to the previous screen. Thesystem will then play the first file onthe selected item.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu


SKIP

Features

137

Press theTUNE/SOUND knob.

10/06/23 14:12:20 31SNA650_142

－

－

－

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle modes by using the RPT andRDM buttons.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press the RPTbutton again.

This featureplays all available files in a selectedlist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatethe shuffle all feature, press theRDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press andhold the RDM button.

This featureplays all available albums in aselected list (playlists, artists, albumsor songs) in random order. The filesin each album are played in therecorded order. To activate theshuffle album feature, press theRDM button repeatedly. You will see‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button.

Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes fromshuffle all play to shuffle album play,then to normal play.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.


To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

REPEAT

SHUFFLE ALL

SHUFFLE ALBUM

138

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:12:27 31SNA650_143

＊

＊

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded). Press the AUX button toswitch the audio mode between theXM Radio (if equipped) and iPod.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the display shows ‘‘USBNO DATA.’’

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

:

140


Disconnecting an iPod iPod Error MessagesTo Stop Playing Your iPod

Features

139

10/06/23 14:12:37 31SNA650_144

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

Cause SolutionError Message

USB ROM Error

Appears when anincompatible device isconnected

No files in iPod

Use of unsupportediPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audiosystem off, and turn it on again. Do notreconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 134 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system does notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.


iPod Error Messages

140

USB ERRORBAD USBDEVICE

PLEASE CHECKOWNERSMANUAL

iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECTRETRY

10/06/23 14:12:43 31SNA650_145


Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

Features

On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian SE models

141

AUX BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

DISPLAY BUTTON

CD BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON


SCAN BUTTON

TUNE/FOLDER KNOB

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

10/06/23 14:12:49 31SNA650_146

＊

＊

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay a USB flash memory device,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment, thenpress the AUX button. The ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

:

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice


142

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:12:58 31SNA650_147

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.


Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

CONTINUED


eatures

143

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

10/06/23 14:13:08 31SNA650_148

＞

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.


Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.

Each time you press the DISP button,the display mode shows you insequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist tag, the album tag,the track tag and name off (whichturns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 17characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice



144

USB ADAPTERCABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

10/06/23 14:13:19 31SNA650_149

－

－－

－

CONTINUED

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flashmemory device is playing to selectpassages and change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press and release the sideof the button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SEEK/SKIP button.

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RPT button.

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press the RPT button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRPT button.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button, RDM button, or SCANbutton.


To Change or Select Files

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT Features

145

10/06/23 14:13:30 31SNA650_150

－－－This feature plays thefiles within a USB flash memorydevice in random order. To activerandom play, press the RDM buttontwice. You will see RDM in thedisplay. Press and release the RDMbutton to return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press and release the RDM button.You will see F-RDM in the display.The system will then select and playfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing and holding the RDMbutton for 2 seconds, or by selectinga different folder with the TUNEknob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random, to all random,then to normal play.

This feature samples allfiles in the current folder in theorder they are stored. To activatethe scan feature, press the SCANbutton. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file in the folder.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of the scan mode and playthe last file sampled.


RANDOM FOLDER-RANDOM SCAN

146

10/06/23 14:13:36 31SNA650_151

－ This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofthe first file in each folder. Press andhold the SCAN button to get out ofthe folder scan mode and play thelast file sampled.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded). Press the AUX button toswitch the audio mode between theUSB or XM Radio (if equipped).

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the display shows ‘‘USB NO DATA.’’

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.

148


FOLDER SCAN To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Features

147

10/06/23 14:13:46 31SNA650_152

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.

Cause SolutionError Message

USB ROM Error


Use of unsupportedfiles

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupportedUSB flash memorydevice


Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 142 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.



148



UNPLAYABLEFILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

10/06/23 14:13:52 31SNA650_153

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Playing the AM/FM RadioVoice Control System

Audio System (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

149

TUNE BAR

BACKGROUNDICON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

SOUND ICON

AUTO SELECTICON


FM1 ICON

FM2 ICON

AM ICON

10/06/23 14:13:59 31SNA650_154

－

▲ ▼

▲

▼＊

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears onthe bottom of the screen each timeyou operate any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see audio informationby touching the AUDIO INFO iconon the lower half of the screen.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

Press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear twobeeps to change the frequencyrapidly. Release the bar when thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , orXM2 ). On the FM band, STEREOwill be displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

If equipped

For information on XM Radio, seepage .

:

153

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

150

10/06/23 14:14:09 31SNA650_155

－

－

▲ ▼

－

Each preset button’s frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Preset

SEEK

SCAN


eatures

151

10/06/23 14:14:19 31SNA650_156

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then touch theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashing in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theAUTO SEL icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.199

To turn off auto select,

AUTO SELECT


152

10/06/23 14:14:25 31SNA650_157

CONTINUED


Playing the XM Radio

Features

153

TUNE BARU.S. Si model is shown. PRESET BUTTONS

MODE ICONXM RADIO ICON

JOYSTICK

CHANNELINDICATOR

PRESET CHANNELNUMBER

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

XM RADIO BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

10/06/23 14:14:32 31SNA650_158

－

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the XMRADIO button. Adjust the volume byturning the knob. The last channelyou listened to will show in thedisplay.

You can also change to the XMRadio while you are listening to anFM station, AM station, disc, PCcard, etc., by touching the XM1 orXM2 icon on the audio display.

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Radio anywhere inthe United States, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

XM is a registered trademark ofSirius XM Radio , Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.When you press and hold theAUDIO button, the display alsoshows all XM information.

You can also operate the radio usingthe control buttons on the left side ofthe screen. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen eachtime you press any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see the audioinformation by touching the AUDIOINFO icon on the lower part of thescreen.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,touch the MODE icon. In channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels. In category mode,such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,you can select all of the channelswithin that category. Each time youtouch and release the MODE icon,the display changes between thechannel mode and the categorymode.


Operating the XM Radio

MODE

154

10/06/23 14:14:40 31SNA650_159

－－

－

－

▲▼

CONTINUED

You can store up to 12preset channels using each presetbutton or preset icons on the screen.Each preset button or icon storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

Press the XM RADIO button.Either XM1 or XM2 will show inthe display.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

Press and holdeither side of the TUNE bar( or ) until you hear a beepto select another category.

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

1.

2.

3.


PresetTUNE

SCAN

CATEGORY

Features

155

10/06/23 14:14:52 31SNA650_160

▲ ▼To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

Touch the CHANNEL LIST icon toswitch the display to the channel listwhich shows all channels in allcategories. Select and touch adesired channel.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM RADIO button againor touch the other XM icon (XM1or XM2) on the audio display.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it. Each presetbutton’s channel is shown on thebottom of the audio display.

You can also select a desired channelfrom the list shown on the screen.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio control display on thenavigation screen.

4.

5.


To Select a Channel from List

156

CHANNEL LIST ICON

10/06/23 14:15:02 31SNA650_161

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.

To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO INFO’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


eatures

157

10/06/23 14:15:11 31SNA650_162

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.


158

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstaclesto the south.

GROUND REPEATER

10/06/23 14:15:19 31SNA650_163

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system andpress the XM RADIO button. Avariety of music types and styles willplay.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the TUNEbar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCANADA .


www.xmradio.com


Receiving XM Radio Service

Features

159

10/06/23 14:15:30 31SNA650_164

－

－

－

－

－

－You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker. To adjust thesound strength, touch or

on each side of the adjustmentbar.

The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.

The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.

Adjusts the treble. Toadjust the treble and bass, toucheither or on the treble orbass adjustment bar. The adjustmentbar on the lower right display showsyou the current setting.

Adjusting the Sound

BASS

BALANCE

SUBWOOFER

SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)

FADER

TREBLE


160

SOUND ICON

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTING

10/06/23 14:15:44 31SNA650_165

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

You can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.

If you feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose Hi.

You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenmove the joystick to left or right tochange the setting.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

75

Audio System LightingScreen Mode


eatures

161

10/06/23 14:15:52 31SNA650_166

－

＋

Playing a Disc


162

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

TUNE BAR


REWIND BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

CD ICON

SKIP BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

FAST FORWARD BUTTONRANDOM BUTTON

10/06/23 14:15:58 31SNA650_167

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toload or play discs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ on the screen. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear on thescreen. You can select up to 99folders and play up to 999 tracks. Ifthe disc has a complex structure, ittakes a while to read the disc beforethe system begins to play it.

If a file on WMA disc is protected bydigital rights management (DRM),the audio unit displays CD FORMAT,and then skips to the next file.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.


CONTINUED

To Play a Disc


eatures

163

NOTE:


10/06/23 14:16:08 31SNA650_168

The disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc player appears.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded down screen as a tray.If you put a cup, for example, on thescreen, the liquid inside the cup mayspill on the screen when you go overa bump.

To Load a Disc


164

OPEN BUTTON

DISC SLOT

CLOSE BUTTON

10/06/23 14:16:16 31SNA650_169

－

－

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the disc player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD button. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower portion of the screen.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audio display.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,the folder number and name, the filenumber and name, the artist name,and the elapsed time are shown. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes. If the discwas not recorded with text data, itwill not be displayed.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press ENTon the top of the joystick to selectthe icon.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6 button), theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease (preset 5 button), toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold

(preset 4 button) or(preset 3 button).

CONTINUED


SKIP

FF/REW


eatures

165

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION


PRESET BUTTONS

10/06/30 13:50:33 31SNA650_170

－

▲▼

－

－

－

－Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button(preset 1). You will see TRACKREPEAT in the display. Press andhold the RPT button for 2 seconds toturn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeFOLDER REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff folder repeat.

Thisfeature plays the tracks within a disc(the files within a folder) in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display. Press andhold the RDM button for 2 secondsto return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in each folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed. To activate folderrandom, press the RDM button(preset 2) twice. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM in the display.The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing the RDM button again, or ifyou select a different folder with theTUNE bar.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeFOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder)

FOLDER RANDOM


166

10/06/23 14:16:36 31SNA650_171

－－

You can also select a track/filedirectly from a track list on the audiodisplay. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio display, then touchthe Track List icon. The track listmenu appears on the display.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 button or 6 button) also turns offscan.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press and hold the SCANbutton for 2 seconds to get out ofscan mode and play the last track/file sampled.

This feature,when activated, samples all the firstfiles in each folder on the disc inorder. To activate folder scan, pressand hold the SCAN button. You willsee FOLDER SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file ineach folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system thenplays the first file in each folder for10 seconds each. After playing thefirst file of the last folder, the systemgoes to normal play.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6), or selecting a different folderwith the TUNE bar, or pressing theSCAN button, also turns off folderscan.

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

Using a Track ListSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)FOLDER SCAN


eatures

167

FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON

FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON

10/06/23 14:16:46 31SNA650_172

▲ ▼＊

＊

＊

To remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page ). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber and the location are alsodisplayed.

You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

Select the desired track/file bytouching the icon on the display. Theselected icon will be highlighted inblue. The system begins to play theselected track/file. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, touch the folder iconon the upper left of the screen tomove to the parent folder. Thecurrent folder is highlighted in blue.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , orXM2 icon. If a PC card is in theaudio unit, touch the CARD icon toplay the PC card. Press the CDbutton again or touch the CD icon toswitch back to the disc player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

If equipped:

164

Removing a DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc


168

10/06/23 14:16:57 31SNA650_173

▲▼

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .An optional six or eight disc changer

is available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio.

To select the disc changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use either side of theTUNE bar. To select the previousdisc, press the side. To select thenext disc, press the side.

201

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Protecting Discs


eatures

169

10/06/23 14:17:04 31SNA650_174



If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message SolutionCause

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Make sure it is inserted correctly in the discplayer. Make sure the disc is not scratched ordamaged. For more information, see page 202.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Formore information, see page 202.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Formore information, see page 202.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

TOC Error

High Temperature

Disc Player Error Messages


170

10/06/23 14:17:15 31SNA650_175

＋

－

Playing a PC Card


eatures

171

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

TUNE BAR


REWIND BUTTON

TRACK LIST ICON PC CARD ICON

PLAY MODE ICON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

FAST FORWARD BUTTONRANDOM BUTTON

10/06/23 14:17:22 31SNA650_176

You operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the disc player. To load or play acard, the ignition switch must be inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ whena card is playing. The card limit ofthe player is 99 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.

Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.

When you insert a PC card intothe slot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

You cannot close the screen(move it to the upright position)until the PC card is inserted all theway into its slot or removed.

Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:

CompactFlashFlash ATASD memory card

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.

To Play a PC Card


172

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:17:32 31SNA650_177

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.

Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thescreen.


In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

CONTINUED

Loading a PC Card


eatures

173

PC CARD SLOT

10/06/23 14:17:43 31SNA650_178

There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks when theywere added to the card, it will not bedisplayed on the screen.

Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.

To Select a Play Mode


174

FOLDER MODE

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON

MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE

10/06/23 14:17:55 31SNA650_179

To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘Continue playing the current song,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode after playing the currentfile.

CONTINUED


eatures

175

PLAY MODE ICON

10/06/23 14:18:04 31SNA650_180

If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the files in order to the new list.

To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress ENT on the top of the joystickto select the icon.



176

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION


10/06/23 14:18:12 31SNA650_181

－

－

－

▲▼

－

－

－

－

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6 button), theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press andrelease (preset 5 button), toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4button) or (preset 3 button).

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipthe next folder, and press the sideto move to the beginning of thecurrent folder. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

To continuously replaya file, press and release the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files in theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2seconds. You will see FOLDERREPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT orALBUM REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder/artist/album. Pressand hold the RPT button for 2seconds again to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM button, or selecting adifferent folder/artist/album withthe TUNE bar also turns off therepeat feature.

This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate trackrandom, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press and hold the RDM button for 2seconds to return to normal play.

This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, press the RDM button(preset 2) 2 times. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM, ARTISTRANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM inthe display.

CONTINUED

SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM


eatures

177

10/06/30 13:50:40 31SNA650_182

－

－The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again, oryou select a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 button or 6 button) alsoturns off the scan feature.

The scan function samplesall files on the PC card in the orderthey are recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file on the PC card.Press and hold the SCAN button for2 seconds to get out of scan modeand play the last file sampled.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder/artist/album on the PCcard in order. To activate each scanfeature, press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep. You willsee FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCANor ALBUM SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 button or 6 button),selecting a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar, orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the scan feature.

SCAN

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMSCAN


178

10/06/23 14:18:28 31SNA650_183

▲ ▼You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. In folder mode, touch thefolder icon on the upper left of thescreen to move to the parent folder.The current folder is highlighted inblue.

In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.

CONTINUED

Using a Track List


eatures

179

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON ARTIST NAME

TRACK LIST ICON

10/06/23 14:18:40 31SNA650_184

In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ fromthe track list display, the song searchmenu appears.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title byKeyword, Artist, and Album.

Song Search Function


180

ARTIST ICON

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

RETURN ICON

SONG SEARCH ICON

Folder mode is shown. ALBUM ICON

ALBUM NAME

10/06/23 14:18:50 31SNA650_185

▲ ▼

Searching for a Song Title by Keyword Searching for a Song by Artist Name

In Title by Keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Touch the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the screen, thedisplay returns to the mode menuwithout doing a search.

To cancel the selected letter, selectthe letter and touch the Delete icon.To select more characters, touch theMore icon. The other character listwill be shown.

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing ENT.

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist’s file list is displayed.

CONTINUED


eatures

181

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

ARTIST LIST

FILE LIST

MORE ICON

10/06/23 14:19:00 31SNA650_186

＊

＊

＊

Searching for a Song by Album Name

Select the Album icon, and thealbum list appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

To remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page

). Press the eject button ( )to remove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.

If there is a problem with the PCcard player, see your dealer.

To play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , orXM2 icon. If a disc is in the audiounit, press the CD button or touchthe CD icon to play the disc. Touchthe CARD icon to switch back to thePC card player.

When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the card willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.

If equipped:

164

To Stop Playing a PC Card

PC Card Player Malfunction

Removing a PC Card


182

ALBUM LIST

10/06/23 14:19:12 31SNA650_187

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a PC card, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

Error Message Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files on the PC card.There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMAfiles in the PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.It appears when an unsupported PC card is inserted. The systemsupports CF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk 6-in-1 Card Adapter.

PC Card Error Messages


eatures

183

FILE ERROR

NO MUSIC

MEDIA ERROR

10/06/23 14:19:18 31SNA650_188

－

＋

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the in-dash disc player. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment by usingyour dock connector. Press theAUDIO button beside the screen toshow the audio display and touch theAUX icon. The ignition switch mustbe in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

Playing an iPod To Play an iPod


184

JOYSTICK

iPod INDICATOR USB ICON

AUDIO BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

CD BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON


REPEAT BUTTON REWINDBUTTON

SKIPBUTTON

FAST FORWARD BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

10/06/23 14:19:26 31SNA650_189

CONTINUED

ModeliPod classic(80/160 G)iPod classic(120 G)iPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod nano5th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

SoftwareVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 2.0.1 or more

Ver. 1.3.0 or more


Ver. 1.1.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.1 or more



We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:


Voice Control System

Features

185

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:19:38 31SNA650_190

－

－


Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

The current file number and total ofthe selected playable files aredisplayed on the screen. It alsoshows the artist, album and track(file) names on the screen.

Use the SKIP button while an iPod isplaying to change files.



1.

2.

3.

www.apple.com/itunes/

Connecting an iPod

To Change or Select Files


SKIP

FF/REW

186

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

10/06/30 13:50:49 31SNA650_191

CONTINUED

You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs. Press theAUDIO button to display the screen,then touch the iPod MENU icon.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press ENT.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.


To Select a File from iPod Menu

Features

187

10/06/23 14:19:59 31SNA650_192

▲ ▼

－

－You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.


To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.

You can select any type of repeat andrandom mode by using the RPTbutton or RDM button.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton (Preset 1 button). You willsee ‘‘REPEAT’’ in the display. Toturn it off, press the RPT button(Preset 1 button) again.

This featureplays all available files from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. To activate thetrack random feature, press theRDM button (Preset 2 button). Youwill see ‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press theRDM button (Preset 2 button).

Using a Track List To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM


188

RETURN ICONTRACK LIST ICON

10/06/23 14:20:11 31SNA650_193

－

＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊

This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recordedorder. To activate the album randomfeature, press and hold the RDMbutton (Preset 2 button). You willsee ‘‘ALBUM RANDOM’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RDM button (Preset 2 button).

You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1 , or XM2 icon. Press the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD button, the audio modeswitches between iPod, disc andXM Radio .

If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the navigation screenshows ‘‘NO DATA.’’

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

If equipped

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector from

the USB adapter cable.

:

:

190

ALBUM RANDOM To Stop Playing Your iPod

iPod Error MessagesDisconnecting an iPod


eatures

189

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:20:24 31SNA650_194

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing an iPod, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

CauseError Message Solution

USB ROM Error


No files in iPod

Use of unsupportediPod

Recognition failure ofiPod


Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 185 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system does notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages


190



iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECTRETRY

10/06/23 14:20:30 31SNA650_195

－

＋

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device


eatures

191

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

CD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON


USB ICON

TUNE FOLDER BAR

WMA/MP3 INDICATOR

SKIP BUTTONREWIND BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON FAST FORWARD BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

10/06/23 14:20:37 31SNA650_196

＊

＊

This audio system can select andplay the audio files from a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play a USB flash memorydevice, connect it to the USB adaptercable in the console compartment.The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andtouch the AUX icon.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

:

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice


192

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:20:46 31SNA650_197

CONTINUED

The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.


Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.


Voice Control System

Features

193

10/06/23 14:20:58 31SNA650_198

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.


In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected and the USB mode isselected on the audio system, theWMA or MP3 indicator is shown onthe navigation screen. It also showsthe folder and file numbers, and theelapsed time on the screen.

1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


194

USB CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

10/06/23 14:21:07 31SNA650_199

▲ ▼

－

－

－

▼▲

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.


To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.



Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar. Press the

side to skip to the next folder,and press the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

Use the SKIP button while a USBflash memory device is playing tochange files.

CONTINUED

Using a Track ListTo Change or Select Files

SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION


eatures

195

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON

TRACK LIST ICON

10/06/30 13:50:59 31SNA650_200

－

－

－－

－

－

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button, RDM button, or SCANbutton.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe track repeat feature, press theRPT button (Preset 1 button). Youwill see ‘‘TRACK REPEAT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press the RPTbutton (Preset 1 button).

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press and hold the RPT button(Preset 1 button). You will see‘‘FOLDER REPEAT’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRPT button (Preset 1 button).

This featureplays all the files in random order.To activate the track random feature,press the RDM button (Preset 2button). You will see ‘‘TRACKRANDOM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press the RDM button (Preset 2button).

This featuresamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pressthe SCAN button. You will see‘‘TRACK SCAN’’ in the display. Youwill also see the file number blinking.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file in the folder. Press theSCAN button to get out of the scanmode. The system plays the last filesampled.

This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press and hold the SCAN button.You will see ‘‘FOLDER SCAN’’ in thedisplay. You will also see the foldernumber blinking. You will get a 10second sampling of the first file ineach folder. Press the SCAN buttonto get out of the scan mode. Thesystem plays the last file sampled.

Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order. To activatethe folder random feature, press andhold the RDM button (Preset 2button). You will see ‘‘FOLDERRANDOM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button(Preset 2 button).

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

TRACK REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM TRACK SCAN

FOLDER SCAN

FOLDER RANDOM


196

10/06/30 13:51:05 31SNA650_201

＊＊

＊

＊

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1 , or XM2 icon. Press the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD button, the audio modeswitches between the USB, disc andXM Radio .

If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the navigation screen shows ‘‘NODATA.’’

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

If equipped

If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.

:

198

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device


Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


eatures

197

10/06/23 14:21:39 31SNA650_202

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing a USB flashmemory device, find the solution inthe chart to the right. If you cannotclear the error message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

USB ROM Error


Use of unsupportedfiles

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupportedUSB flash memorydevice


Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 192 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.



198



UNPLAYABLEFILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

10/06/23 14:21:45 31SNA650_203

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

199

10/06/23 14:21:55 31SNA650_204

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


AM/FM Radio Reception

200

10/06/23 14:22:02 31SNA650_205

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

201


10/06/23 14:22:15 31SNA650_206

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

The disc player/changer has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated below, it maybecome stuck inside and damage theaudio unit.

1.

2. 3.

Additional Information onRecommended Discs

Protecting Your Discs

202

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Sealed With PlasticRing

10/06/23 14:22:28 31SNA650_207

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

203

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

10/06/23 14:22:41 31SNA650_208

＋－

＋

－

▲ ▼＋

－

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

To activate the seek function, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear abeep. The system searches up ordown from the current frequency tofind a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track or file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track or file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes themode.

Pressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through allpossible media sources whether theyare present or not.

Pressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through all present,connected media sources. Mediasources that are not present orconnected will not appear whencycling with the MODE button.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press and release thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset station on theband you are listening to. Press andrelease the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous station.

If equipped

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles without navigation system

Remote Audio Controls

204

CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

10/06/23 14:22:53 31SNA650_209

＋

－

＋

－

＋

－

If you are playing a PC card, pressthe top ( ) of the CH button toadvance to the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious file.

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable (if equipped), pressand release the top ( ) of the CHbutton to skip forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press ittwice to return to the previous file.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton to select it.

The auxiliary input jack isunderneath the accessory powersocket on the front panel. Thesystem will accept auxiliary inputfrom standard audio accessoriesusing a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereominiplug.

On models with audio systemAuxiliary Input Jack

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input JackF

eatures

205

10/06/23 14:23:01 31SNA650_210

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons (icons onvehicles with navigation system) toenter the code. The code is on theradio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific 5 digit code using thepreset buttons (icon on vehicle’s withnavigation system). Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from specificdigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

On models with audio system

Radio Theft Protection

206

10/06/23 14:23:08 31SNA650_211

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

Change the hours by pressing the H(preset 1) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(preset 2) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

To set the time, press the CLOCK(AM/FM) button until the displayedtime begins to blink, then release thebutton.

Press the CLOCK (AM/FM) buttonagain to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theCLOCK (AM/FM) button until youhear a beep, then pressing the R(preset 3) button sets the clock backto the previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the clocksets forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

Setting the ClockF

eatures

207

CLOCK BUTTON


RESET BUTTON

MINUTE BUTTON

HOUR BUTTON

10/06/23 14:23:18 31SNA650_212

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,driver’s lock tab, door lock masterswitch, or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and trunk openindicators on the instrument panel(see page ) to see if the doors andtrunk are fully closed. Since it is notpart of the monitor display, manuallycheck the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights (low beam), parkinglights, side marker lights, andtaillights flash if someone attemptsto break into your vehicle or removethe radio. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then it stops. To reset anactivated system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter. Once the security system is set,

opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause thealarm to activate. It will also activateif the audio unit is removed from thedashboard or the wiring is cut.

61

If equipped

Security System

208

NOTE:

Except Si

Si


10/06/23 14:23:28 31SNA650_213

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

1.

2.

3.If equipped Using the Cruise Control

Cruise ControlF

eatures

209

CRUISE BUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

10/06/23 14:23:40 31SNA650_214

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.To increase the speed in very

small amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal untilyou reach the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

210

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:23:52 31SNA650_215

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

211

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

10/06/23 14:24:01 31SNA650_216

－

－

Bluetooth

handsfreelink.honda.com

On models with navigation system

www.handsfreelink.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL)allows you to place and receivephone calls using voice commands,without handling your cell phone.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

Press andrelease to give a command or answera call.

Press andrelease to end a call, go back to theprevious command, or cancel thecommand.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents and allwindows may interfere with themicrophone. Adjust or close themas necessary.

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876.

Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

HFL ButtonsVoice Control Tips

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

212

HFL BACK BUTTON

HFL TALKBUTTON

MICROPHONE

NAVI VOICECONTROLBUTTONS

10/06/23 14:24:14 31SNA650_217

＃＃＃＃

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton each time you want tomake a command. After the beep,speak in a clear, natural tone.

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay ‘‘Call 123-456- ’’ or‘‘Dial Peter.’’

When HFL is in use, navigationvoice commands cannot berecognized.

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

To hear general HFL information,including help on pairing a phoneor setting up the system, say‘‘Tutorial.’’

For help at any time, including alist of available commands, say‘‘Hands free help.’’

CONTINUED


Help Features

Features

213

10/06/23 14:24:24 31SNA650_218

A notification that there is anincoming call, or HFL is in use, willappear on the navigation screenwhen the audio system is on.

On the map screen, you will see a‘‘HFL’’ message on the screen.

‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed onthe audio display when a phone islinked.

However, when the current street isshown, and AUDIO INFO icon isvisible, ‘‘HFL’’ will not appear whenthere is an incoming call.


Information Display

214

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

HFL MESSAGE

10/06/23 14:24:34 31SNA650_219

＃＃＃＃

CONTINUED


How to Use HFL

Features

215

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘Jim Smith’’

‘‘Set PairingCode’’

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

‘‘List’’

‘‘Status’’

‘‘Next Phone’’

Press HFLTalk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

‘‘123-456- ’’

(See page 218)Pair a phone to the system

(See page 219)Edit the name of a paired phone

(See page 219)Delete a paired phone from the system

(See page 219)Hear a list of all phones paired to the system

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system(See page 220)

(See page 220)Search for another previously paired phone to link to

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number(See page 220)

Enter desired phone number (See page 221)

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.(See page 221)

10/06/23 14:24:44 31SNA650_220


216

‘‘Redial’’

‘‘Transfer’’

‘‘Mute’’

‘‘Send’’

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘ReceiveContact’’

‘‘List’’



Redial the last number called (See page 222)

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 224)

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 225)

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 225)

Store a phonebook entry (See page 226)

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 226)

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 227)

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts fromyour phone to HFL (See page 227)

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 227)

10/06/23 14:24:49 31SNA650_221

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

217

‘‘Change Language’’

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

‘‘SystemSet up’’

‘‘Tutorial’’

‘‘Clear’’

‘‘Auto Transfer’’

‘‘Call Notification’’

‘‘Security’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’



: Canadian models

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each keycycle to access the system (See page 232)

Change your security passcode (See page 233)

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call(See page 233)

(See page 233)Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when youenter the vehicle

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and securitypasscode (See page 234)

Change language from English to French (See page 234)

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 213)

(See page 213)

10/06/23 14:24:57 31SNA650_222

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

This command group is available forpaired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discoveryor search mode to pair. Refer toyour phone’s manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton. If you are pairing a phonefor the first time, HFL will giveyou information about the pairingprocess. If it is not the first phoneyou are pairing, say ‘‘

’’ and say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and putyour phone in discovery or searchmode. HFL will give you a 4-digitpairing code and begin searchingfor your phone.

When your phone finds aBluetooth device, select HFL fromthe options and enter the 4-digitcode from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts andname the newly paired phone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Phone Setup

Phonesetup Pair

Phone pairing tips

To pair a cell phone:


218

10/06/23 14:25:09 31SNA650_223

Say ‘‘ .’’

Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.

If there is more than one phonepaired to the system, HFL will askyou which phone’s name you wantto change. Follow the HFLprompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will ask you which phone youwant to delete. Follow the HFLprompts to continue with thedeletion.


HFL will read out all the pairedphone’s names.


Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

DeleteList

Phone setup

To hear the names of all pairedphones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:


eatures

219

10/06/23 14:25:24 31SNA650_224


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will tell you which phone islinked to the system.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone.

Once another phone is found, it islinked to the system. HFL willinform you which phone is nowlinked.

If no other phones are found orpaired, HFL will inform you that theoriginal phone is linked again.


If you want HFL to create arandom code each time you pair aphone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you wantto choose your own 4-digit code tobe used each time, say ‘‘ ’’and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.


To hear which paired phone iscurrently linked:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setupPhone setup

Next phoneSet pairing code

Random

Fixed

220

10/06/23 14:25:41 31SNA650_225

CONTINUED

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to HFL. HFLuses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talkup to 30 minutes after you removethe key from the ignition switch.However, this may weaken thevehicle’s battery.

You can make calls using a name inthe HFL phonebook or any phonenumber. You can also redial the lastnumber called.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name stored in the HFLphonebook that you want to call.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the name and make thecall.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.


Making a Call

Call Dial Call Dial

Call Dial

To make a call using a name in theHFL phonebook:

To make a call using a phonenumber:

Features

221

10/06/23 14:25:55 31SNA650_226

Select ‘‘.’’

Press the INFO button, then select‘‘ .’’

Select a phonebook you want tochoose a phone number from.

If the phonebook you select is PIN-protected, you will need to enter thePIN to access it. See page formore information.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

230


Search ImportedPhonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Redial

To redial the last number called byHFL:

To make a call from an importedphonebook:

222

10/06/23 14:26:05 31SNA650_227

Select the name. All the phonenumbers stored for that name willbe listed.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

Select the desired number to callfrom the list.

Selecting ‘‘,’’ the phone

number will be stored in HFL, sothat you can call it using HFL’s nametag by voice.

4.

5.


List

Store inHandsFreeLink

Features

223

List ICON

10/06/23 14:26:15 31SNA650_228

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the HFL Talk button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe HFL Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HFL Back button.

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

When you receive a call, an incomingcall notification (if activated) willplay and interrupt the audio systemif it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answerthe call, or the HFL Back button tohang up.


Call Waiting Transferring a Call

Transfer

Receiving a Call

224

10/06/23 14:26:23 31SNA650_229

＃

CONTINUED

You can store up to 50 names withtheir associated numbers in HFL.The numbers you store can be notonly phone numbers but other types,such as account numbers orpasswords, which can be sent duringa menu-driven call.

You can mute your voice to theperson you are talking to during acall.

To mute your voice during a call,press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

To unmute your voice, press andrelease the HFL Talk button and say‘‘ ’’ again.

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name or number you want tosend.

Follow the HFL prompts to sendthe tones and continue the call.

To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

1.

2.

3.


PhonebookMuting a Call

Mute

Mute

Send Numbers or Names Duringa Call

Send

To send a name or number during acall:

Features

225

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:26:35 31SNA650_230

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize amultisyllabic or longer name. Forexample, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of‘‘John.’’


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new numberfor that name.

Follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the edit.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say a name you want to list as yourphonebook entry.

Say the number you want to storefor the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook

Store

Enter

To edit the number stored in a name:To store a phonebook entry:


226

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:26:52 31SNA650_231



Say ‘‘ .’’


Say the name you want to deleteand follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the deletion.

Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL begins reading the names inthe order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call,immediately press the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts, select anumber from your cell phone, andsend it to HFL.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts andname the number, or say‘‘ ’’ if it is not the numberyou want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if youwant to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone numberfrom your cell phone directly to theHFL phonebook (available on somephones):


eatures

227

10/06/23 14:27:08 31SNA650_232

(available on some phones)

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.handsfreelink.ca,

The entire phonebook data of thecell phone that is linked to HFL canbe imported to the navigation system.

Select ‘‘,’’ and HFL will begin

importing the phonebook. Select‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.

Once a phonebook has beenimported, you can search the phonenumbers by the person’s name.

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

Select a phonebook from the list.

If you selectfrom the Information screen menu,you will see four HFL options.

For a list of cell phones that arecompatible with this feature:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876.

Import CellularPhonebook

OK

Search ImportedPhonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:


228

IMPORTED PHONEBOOK

IMPORTED DATE

PIN ICON

10/06/23 14:27:21 31SNA650_233

Select a person from the list. Up tothree category icons are displayed inthe left side of the list:

Select the person’s number you wantto call, and press the HFL Talkbutton.

These indicate how many numbersare stored for the name. If a namehas more than three category icons,‘‘…’’ is displayed.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

CONTINUED

List


eatures

229

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

List ICON

10/06/23 14:27:37 31SNA650_234

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

After making a selection, thefollowing screen will appear.

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then ‘‘ ’’ to completethe deletion.

You can add, change, or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.

You can delete any importedphonebook.

Select a phonebook you want todelete. If the phonebook is PIN-protected, you will need to enter the4-digit PIN number.

If you have selected a phonebookwithout a PIN, you will see the abovedisplay.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You willhave to re-enter the PIN forconfirmation.

Delete ImportedPhonebook

Yes OK

PIN NumberDelete Imported Phonebook:

To add a PIN:


230

10/06/23 14:27:49 31SNA650_235

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select‘‘ ’’ after you enterthe current PIN.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter the PINfor verification.

The display will change as shownabove.

Select the phonebook you want. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Enter the current PIN for thisphonebook.

To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:PIN number

Do not use PIN


eatures

231

10/06/23 14:27:58 31SNA650_236

This command group allows you tochange or customize HFL basicsettings.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Once a passcode is set, youwill need to enter it to use HFL eachtime you start the vehicle. If youforget the code, your dealer will haveto reset it for you, or you will have toclear the entire system (see page

).

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe 4-digit passcode you want toset.


1.

2.

3.

4.

234

System Setup

System setup

Security

To set a 4-digit passcode to lock theHFL system for security purposes:


232

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:28:09 31SNA650_237

＊

＊

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ .’’Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.

Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe new 4-digit passcode.


The default setting is a ring tone.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ Youcan also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audibleincoming call notification.


HFL will let you know if autotransfer is on or off, depending onthe previous setting. Follow theHFL prompts to change thesetting.


2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3. 1.

:

CONTINUED

System setup

System setup

System setupChange passcode

Ring tone PromptOff

Call notif ication

Auto transfer

To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or aprompt as the incoming callnotif ication :

To activate or deactivate the autotransfer function:


eatures

233

10/06/23 14:28:24 31SNA650_238

This operation clears the passcodes,paired phones, all names in the HFLphonebook, and all importedphonebook data.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts tocontinue to complete the clearingprocedure.

You can also clear the system whenyou have forgotten the passcode andcannot access HFL. When HFL asksyou for the passcode, say ‘‘

.’’ Paired phones, all names inthe HFL phonebook and all importedphonebook data will be lost.


Follow the HFL prompts.

Say the language you want tochange to in that language.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts tochange the language to English orFrench.

If you have not named your pairedphone in the language you justselected, HFL will ask you to name itin the current language.

When French is your currentlyselected language, you can give voicecommands in French.

1.

2.

3.

2.

1.

2.

1.

Canadian models only Canadian models only

System setup

Clear

Systemclear

Quick Language Selection Change Language

Change language

To clear the system:

To quickly change the language: To change the system languagebetween English and French:


234

10/06/23 14:28:41 31SNA650_239

The name and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.

BluetoothAs required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.




Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Features

235

10/06/23 14:28:48 31SNA650_240

236

10/06/23 14:28:51 31SNA650_241

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 238.................Fuel Recommendation . 238

.........Service Station Procedures . 239....................................Refueling . 239

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 240

...................................Oil Check . 241.............Engine Coolant Check . 243

...............................Fuel Economy . 244...Accessories and Modifications . 247

.............................Carrying Cargo . 249

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

237

10/06/23 14:28:55 31SNA650_242

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance. Useof a gasoline with a pump octanenumber less than 87 can lead toengine damage.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

All models except Si

Si model only

238

10/06/23 14:29:08 31SNA650_243

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, orinformation on gasoline that doesnot contain MMT, visit OwnerLink at . InCanada, visit foradditional information on gasoline.

1.

2.

owners.honda.comwww.honda.ca

Refueling

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

239

Push

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

10/06/23 14:29:19 31SNA650_244

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. Thehood will pop up slightly.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank equalizes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offeven though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

1.

5.

6.4.

3.

341

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

240

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

10/06/23 14:29:28 31SNA650_245

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip, and insert theend into the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightlyto remove the support rod fromthe hole. Put the support rod backinto its holding clip. Lower thehood to about a foot (30 cm) abovethe fender, then let it drop. Makesure it is securely latched.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3.

1.

2.

3.2.

CONTINUED


Oil Check

Before

Driving

241

DIPSTICKSUPPORT ROD

LATCHGRIP

Except Si

10/06/23 14:29:40 31SNA650_246

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.290


Adding Engine Oil

242

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

Si Except Si Si

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

10/06/23 14:29:48 31SNA650_247

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

286

294Adding

Engine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check

Service Station ProcedureB

eforeD

riving

243

MAX

MIN

MAX

MINExcept Si Si

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK

10/06/23 14:29:55 31SNA650_248

－－

－－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits, and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Represents urbandriving in light traffic. A range ofmiles per gallon achieved is alsoprovided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the cost

per gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPGEstimated Annual Fuel Cost

244

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

10/06/23 14:30:07 31SNA650_249

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

286CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

290

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Before

Driving

245

10/06/23 14:30:24 31SNA650_250

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles(kilometers).

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

246

Miles perGallon

100 Kilometers

Gallonsof fuel

Milesdriven

Liter L per100 km

10/06/23 14:30:36 31SNA650_251

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle, or improve its performance.These accessories have beendesigned and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system (ifequipped).

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

343

Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

247

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

10/06/23 14:30:47 31SNA650_252

＊

＊

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling, stability, andreliability.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) .

: If equipped

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

248

10/06/23 14:30:56 31SNA650_253

＊

＊

＊

＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor and seat-back pocketsConsole compartmentTrunk, including the rear seatswhen folded downCenter pocket

If equipped

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

:

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

249

GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKETTRUNK

DOOR POCKETS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

SEAT-BACK POCKET

: If equipped

10/06/23 14:31:06 31SNA650_254

－ ×

－

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. modelsand 395 kg for Canadian models.

Label Example

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

(5)

(6)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

250

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

10/06/23 14:31:20 31SNA650_255

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 3

Example 2

: Canadian models

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

251

Passenger Weight150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)



Cargo Weight250 lbs(123 kg)



Max Load 850 lbs(395 kg)



10/06/23 14:31:32 31SNA650_256

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

51

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo

252

10/06/23 14:31:41 31SNA650_257

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA ) system, thetire pressure monitoring system(TPMS), and facts you need if youare planning to tow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 254

........................Preparing to Drive . 255.......................Starting the Engine . 256

...................Manual Transmission . 257..............Automatic Transmission . 260

...........................................Parking . 264.............................Braking System . 265

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 266Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability........Control (ESC), System . 268

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 270

...........................Towing a Trailer . 273

DrivingD

riving

253

10/06/23 14:31:46 31SNA650_258

Because of the low-profile tiresfitted to your vehicle, the alloywheels are closer to the ground.Driving over a pothole or roaddebris at too high a speed canseriously damage a wheel. Slowdown under these conditions.

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

Your vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance andvery low-profile tires.

Driving Guidelines

Si model

254

10/06/23 14:31:52 31SNA650_259

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4. 9.

8.

7.

6.

5. 10.

14

5793

77

314

103

Preparing to DriveD

riving

255

10/06/23 14:32:04 31SNA650_260

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine

256

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .79

10/06/23 14:32:14 31SNA650_261

CONTINUED

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directlyfrom any forward gear to reversewhile the vehicle is moving at acertain speed (see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This can

cause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

259

The engine can be damaged ifyou inadvertently downshift into thewrong gear (for example, going fromthird gear at high rpms to second gearinstead of upshifting to fourth gear; theengine speed limiter will not work in thissituation).

On models with manual transmission

Manual TransmissionD

riving

257

NOTE:

Except Si Si

10/06/23 14:32:23 31SNA650_262

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminum shift lever. If you leave thevehicle parked outside for a long

time on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)27 mph (44 km/h)39 mph (63 km/h)53 mph (85 km/h)

Normal acceleration

17 mph (27 km/h)29 mph (46 km/h)37 mph (60 km/h)43 mph (69 km/h)49 mph (79 km/h)

With 5-speed manual transmission

With 6-speed manual transmission

On Si model

Recommended Shift Points

Manual Transmission

258

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

10/06/23 14:32:33 31SNA650_263

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Your vehicle has a rev limit indicatorto show you when the engine speedis near the tachometer’s red zone(see page ).

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

The manual transmission has alockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from any forward gear toreverse while the vehicle is movingat a certain speed. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped, do the following:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

1.

2.

3.

4.

64

6-speed manual transmission

On Si model

Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual TransmissionD

riving

259

10/06/23 14:32:44 31SNA650_264

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

To shift from Park to any position,press the brake pedal, the releasebutton on the front of the shift lever,then pull the lever. You cannot shiftout of Park when the ignition switchis in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

260

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LEVER

10/06/23 14:32:53 31SNA650_265

－

－

－

－

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

3

3

3

3

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to reverse. To shift

from reverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.263

CONTINUED


Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Drive (D)

Neutral (N)

Driving

261

10/06/23 14:33:03 31SNA650_266

－－

－

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third, fourth, and fifth gearsin stop-and-go driving.

To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button. Thisposition locks the transmission infirst gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,you can operate the transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

3

3

3


Drive (D ) Second (2)

First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter3

262

10/06/23 14:33:13 31SNA650_267

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pressing the release button doesnot let you shift the transmission outof Park:

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Insert the built-in key into the shiftlock release slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the lever outof Park to neutral.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover toprevent scratches. Using a smallflat-tip screwdriver or a metalfingernail file, carefully pry on thenotch of the cover to remove it.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the shift lever side.Insert the key into the ignitionswitch, press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

263

COVER

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCKRELEASE SLOT

NOTCH

10/06/23 14:33:25 31SNA650_268

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Lock the doors.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

On vehicles with security system

Parking Tips

Parking

264

Never install a sunshade between theupper and lower meters on theinstrument panel. If you do, you couldcause heat damage to the upper meteron a very hot day.

10/06/23 14:33:37 31SNA650_269

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking SystemD

riving

265

10/06/23 14:33:46 31SNA650_270

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

342You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

266

10/06/23 14:33:54 31SNA650_271

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

342

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

267

10/06/23 14:34:02 31SNA650_272

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blinks.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

269

On U.S. models

If equipped VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

268

NOTE:

10/06/23 14:34:14 31SNA650_273

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.This switch is under the driver’s side

vent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

320

VSA OFF Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), SystemD

riving

269

10/06/23 14:34:25 31SNA650_274

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

328

U.S. models only Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

270

10/06/23 14:34:35 31SNA650_275

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

314

315

269

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

271

10/06/23 14:34:45 31SNA650_276




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

328

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

272

10/06/23 14:34:55 31SNA650_277

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10% of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a TrailerD

riving

273

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

10/06/23 14:35:04 31SNA650_278

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60% of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40% toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

on the front axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the rear axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

(Si) (Si)

(DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, CanadianDX-G)

(DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, CanadianDX-G)

(EX-L, U.S. EX, Canadian SE)

(EX-L, U.S. EX, Canadian SE)

Checking Loads

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

274

3,671 lbs (1,665 kg)

1,731 lbs (785 kg)

1,940 lbs (880 kg)

3,737 lbs (1,695 kg)

3,924 lbs (1,780 kg)

1,973 lbs (895 kg)

1,764 lbs (800 kg)

2,094 lbs (950 kg)

1,830 lbs (830 kg)

10/06/23 14:35:17 31SNA650_279

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow. If you choose electric brakes, be

sure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, provincial, territorial,and local regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Trailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing a TrailerD

riving

275

10/06/23 14:35:28 31SNA650_280

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, provincial,territorial, and local regulations.Check with your local trailer dealeror rental agency for therequirements in the area where youplan to tow, and use only equipmentdesigned for your vehicle.

Many states and Canadianprovinces/territories require specialoutside mirrors when towing a trailer.Even if they don’t, you should installspecial mirrors if you cannot clearlysee behind you, or if the trailercreates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Additional Towing EquipmentTrailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

276

10/06/23 14:35:35 31SNA650_281

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left, andturn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension,cooling system, and lights are ingood operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

273 274

bottom

Pre-Tow Checklist Backing Up

Parking

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Towing a TrailerD

riving

277

10/06/23 14:35:48 31SNA650_282

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the D positionwhen towing a trailer on level roads.D is the proper shift lever positionto use when towing a trailer in hillyterrain. (See ‘‘ ’’ in thefollowing column for additional gearinformation.)

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .349

33

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Your VehicleTowing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

278

10/06/23 14:36:01 31SNA650_283

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read theMaintenance Minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

U.S. Vehicles: ......................Maintenance Safety . 280.................Maintenance Minder . 281

..............................Fluid Locations . 288........................Adding Engine Oil . 290

Changing the Engine Oil....................................and Filter . 292

..............................Engine Coolant . 294....................Windshield Washers . 297

.......................Transmission Fluid . 298..........Automatic Transmission . 298

..............Manual Transmission . 299................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 300

....................Power Steering Fluid . 301.............................................Lights . 302

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 309.....................................Floor Mats . 310

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 310.................................Wiper Blades . 311

...........................................Wheels . 313...............................................Tires . 314

...................Checking the Battery . 322.............................Vehicle Storage . 324

..................................Interior Care . 325

373

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Maintenance

279

TM

10/06/23 14:36:09 31SNA650_284

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or qualifiedmechanic.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

280

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

10/06/23 14:36:22 31SNA650_285

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100%90%80%70%60%50%40%30%20%15%10%5%0%

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100% 91%90% 81%80% 71%70% 61%60% 51%50% 41%40% 31%30% 21%20% 16%15% 11%10% 6%5% 1%

0%

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until theengine oil life display appears (seepage ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the information displayaccording to this table:

66

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

281

SEL/RESET BUTTON

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

TM

10/06/23 14:36:32 31SNA650_286

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The Maintenance Minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicators remind you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

Maintenance Minder

282

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

SERVICE MESSAGE

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

TM

10/06/23 14:36:39 31SNA650_287

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative distancetraveled is displayed and begins toblink after the vehicle has beendriven 10 miles (10 km) or more.Negative distance traveled meansyour vehicle has passed themaintenance required point.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. TheMaintenance Minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the display to theodometer, the trip meter, and theoutside temperature indicator (ifequipped) by pushing the SEL/RESET button on the dashboardrepeatedly.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the Maintenance Minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

284

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

283

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

TM

10/06/23 14:36:51 31SNA650_288

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeindicator is displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the SEL/RESET button.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative distance traveled, theMaintenance Minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the service done,and make sure to reset the display(see Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay).

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the Maintenance Minder asfollows:

1.

2.287

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

284

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM

TM

10/06/23 14:37:03 31SNA650_289

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show thecorrect maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the SEL/RESET button formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

Press the SEL/RESET button forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

4.3.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

285

TM

10/06/23 14:37:12 31SNA650_290

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

241

243

298

300

314

302

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

286

TM

10/06/23 14:37:24 31SNA650_291

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

287

:

TM

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the secondcolumn on page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

286

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluidReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

34

5

1

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

10/06/23 14:37:33 31SNA650_292

＊

＊

Fluid Locations

Except Si model

288

RADIATOR CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

: Except Canadian DX-G with manual transmission

POWER STEERING FLUID(Red cap)

10/06/23 14:37:38 31SNA650_293

Fluid LocationsM

aintenance

Si model

289

RADIATOR CAP

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

10/06/23 14:37:43 31SNA650_294

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour theoil slowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

290

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Except Si Si

10/06/23 14:37:52 31SNA650_295

－

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is

preferred for improved fuel economyand year-round protection in yourvehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 20°F ( 7°C).

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle, toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

All models except Si:

Si model:

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

291

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

10/06/23 14:38:02 31SNA650_296

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

1. 2.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

292

WASHERDRAIN BOLTWASHER

DRAIN BOLT

Except Si Si

10/06/23 14:38:10 31SNA650_297

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the contacting surfaceof a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the contacting surfaceof the engine. If it is, remove itbefore installing a new oil filter.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3. 4.

Except Si

Si

CONTINUED

Changing the Engine Oil and FilterM

aintenance

293

OIL FILTER

Except Si Si

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

10/06/23 14:38:24 31SNA650_298

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

9. Adding Engine Coolant

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant

294

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK

SiExcept Si

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

10/06/23 14:38:31 31SNA650_299

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

295

RADIATOR CAP

Except Si

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

10/06/23 14:38:39 31SNA650_300

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

296

RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANKRESERVE TANK

Si Except Si Si

10/06/23 14:38:49 31SNA650_301

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

64

On Canadian models:

Windshield WashersM

aintenance

297

LEVEL GAUGE

LEVEL GAUGE

Except Si

Si

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

10/06/23 14:38:57 31SNA650_302

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Always use Honda ATF DW-1(automatic transmission fluid).

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

Transmission Fluid


298

DIPSTICK

LOWERMARK

UPPERMARK

10/06/23 14:39:09 31SNA650_303

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification Seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the Maintenance Minder (seepage ).

6.

281

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission

Maintenance

299

Correct Level

Correct LevelExcept Si Si

FILLER BOLT FILLER BOLT

TM

Use only Honda ATF DW-1 (automatictransmission f luid). Do not mix withother transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda ATF DW-1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaATF DW-1 is not covered by the Hondanew vehicle warranty.

10/06/23 14:39:20 31SNA650_304

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the Maintenance Minder (seepage ).

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Independent of the MaintenanceMinder information, replace thebrake fluid every 3 years.

281

Brake and Clutch Fluid Brake Fluid

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

300

MAX

MIN

TM

10/06/23 14:39:31 31SNA650_305

Manual Transmission only All models except Si and Canadian DX-Gwith manual transmission

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Power Steering FluidClutch Fluid

Maintenance

301

LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

MAX

MIN

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

10/06/23 14:39:44 31SNA650_306

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

To change the headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its holder.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be done by your dealer oranother qualified technician.

1.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb High Beam Headlight

Lights

302

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

10/06/23 14:39:53 31SNA650_307

If you replaced a headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, reinstall theengine coolant reserve tank. To change the bulb on the driver’s

side, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

2.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Low Beam Headlight

Maintenance

303

TAB

HOLDING CLIPBULB

10/06/23 14:40:05 31SNA650_308

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.



5.

6.

1.

7.

8.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb

304

TAB

HOLDING CLIPSOCKET

10/06/23 14:40:15 31SNA650_309

Open the trunk.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing the bulb in and turningit counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Remove the screw from the centerof each fastener on the side of thetrunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight, back-up light, turn signal, or sidemarker.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

2.

2.

CONTINUED

Replacing Rear Bulbs(In Fenders)

LightsM

aintenance

305

FASTENER

FASTENER

10/06/23 14:40:27 31SNA650_310

Open the trunk.Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Put the fasteners into the holes onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screws.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.


Remove the screw from the centerof each fastener on the trunk lidtrim. Pull the trim back.

1.

2.4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

On all EX-L, Canadian SE, and Simodels

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

306

BULBS

SOCKETS

SOCKETS

BULB

FASTENERSBULB

10/06/23 14:40:39 31SNA650_311

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.


Put the fasteners into the holes onthe trunk lid trim. Reinstall thescrews.

Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks. Make surethe new bulb is working.


Open the trunk, and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.3. Except Si model

On all EX-L, Canadian SE, and Simodels

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

307

BULB

SOCKET

BULB

SOCKET

10/06/23 14:40:52 31SNA650_312

To remove the fog light assembly,use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw, then carefullypull it out of the bumper.


Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

The fog lights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

1.

2.

On Si model

Lights

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

308

SCREW

Halogen light bulbs get very hot whenlit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch onthe glass can cause the bulb to overheatand shatter.

10/06/23 14:41:01 31SNA650_313

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Align the two tabs on the fog lightassembly with the holes in thebumper, then push the fog lightassembly into place. Tighten thescrew securely.


Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb. Make sure it is on all theway.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

6.

7.

3.

4.

5.

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Maintenance

309

TAB

TAB

CONNECTOR

BULB

LOOP

10/06/23 14:41:11 31SNA650_314

If equipped

On models with A/CThis filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

Make sure the rear floor mats areproperly positioned. If not, the floormat will interfere with the seatoperation and make the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

Floor Mats Dust and Pollen Filter

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

310

10/06/23 14:41:21 31SNA650_315

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

To replace a wiper blade:

Lift the wiper arm off thewindshield, raising the driver’sside first, then the passenger’sside.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Put a cloth on the edge of thelock tab to prevent scratches,then push up on the lock tabcarefully with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

311

WIPER ARMS LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

10/06/23 14:41:30 31SNA650_316

Pivot the blade assembly towardthe wiper arm until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Make sure the three rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notch ofthe reinforcement, as shown.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

3.

4.

Wiper Blades

312

BLADE

BLADEREINFORCEMENT

WIPER ARM

TOP

10/06/23 14:41:39 31SNA650_317

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assemblyin the direction pointed to by thearrow.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Push downthe lock tab. Make sure the wiperblade assembly locks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Make sure the tab on the bladeassembly fits in the indent of thewiper blade and the blade iscompletely installed.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

5.

6.

7.If equipped

Wiper Blades, Wheels

Wheels

Maintenance

313

INDENT

TAB

10/06/23 14:41:49 31SNA650_318

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think a

tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

270

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

314

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

10/06/23 14:42:01 31SNA650_319

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles/kilometers), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

(Si)

(DX, Canadian DX-G with automatictransmission)

(Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission)

Optional for U.S. Si

357(EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX, CanadianSE)

Tire Size

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Cold Tire PressureTire Size Cold Tire Pressure



Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Maintenance

315

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

215/45ZR17 91W

P215/45R17 87V33 psi (230 kPa ,

2.3 kgf/cm )

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89H30 psi (210 kPa ,

2.1 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89S30 psi (210 kPa ,

2.1 kgf/cm )

P205/55R16 89H32 psi (220 kPa ,

2.2 kgf/cm )

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

10/06/23 14:42:21 31SNA650_320

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Tire pressure for high-speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.

When you return to normal speeddriving, be sure to readjust the tirepressure for normal driving. Youshould wait until the tires are coldbefore adjusting the tire pressure.

For convenience, the recommendedcold air pressures and tire sizes areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

We strongly recommend that you donot drive faster than the postedspeed limits and conditions allow. Ifyou ever drive in a sanctionedcompetitive event at sustained highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown in the nextcolumn. If you do not, excessive heatcan build up and cause sudden tirefailure.

Front/Rear:

357

Si model only

Except Si model

Si model only

Tires

Tire InspectionTire Size·Cold Tire Pressure forHigh Speed Driving

High Speed Driving

316

P215/45R17 87V

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

10/06/23 14:42:33 31SNA650_321

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

359

Tires

Tire Service Life

TireLabeling

Maintenance

317

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

10/06/23 14:42:42 31SNA650_322

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated. Ifyou purchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

The tires that came on your vehiclewere designed and constructed toprovide superior grip duringacceleration, braking, and cornering.

As a trade-off, they will wear morerapidly than tires used on ordinarypassenger vehicles. Because of thevehicle’s weight distribution, and thefact that the front wheels are thedriving wheels, you can expect themto wear more rapidly than the reartires.

On Si model onlyTire Maintenance Tire Rotation Tire Wear

Tires

318

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

10/06/23 14:42:53 31SNA650_323

The mileage you can expect fromyour vehicle tires is the same ascomparable mid-and rear-enginesports cars, and it will vary greatlywith your driving habits.

If you drive moderately, the fronttires could last more than 10,000miles (16,000 km). However, themileage will be substantially less ifyou tend to drive your vehicle at theupper limits of its capabilities.

You should carefully inspect yourvehicle’s tires for wear, damage, andproper inflation every 7,500 miles(12,000 km).

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the ABS or VSA system toactivate.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels (if equipped). If youdo not, the tire pressure monitoringsystem will not work.

CONTINUED

Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Maintenance

319

10/06/23 14:43:04 31SNA650_324

Wheels:See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

Tires:

(DX, Canadian DX-G)

(Si)

(Si)

(DX, Canadian DX-G withautomatic transmission)

(all season tire)

(summer tire)

(Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission)

357

359

(EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX,Canadian SE)

(EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX,Canadian SE)

Optional for U.S. Si

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

320

15 x 6J

215/45ZR17 91W

P215/45R17 87V

P205/55R16 89H

P195/65R15 89S

P195/65R15 89H

17 x 7J

16 x 6 1/2J

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

10/06/23 14:43:16 31SNA650_325

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

If your vehicle is equipped withsummer tires, be aware that thesetires are not designed for winterdriving conditions. For moreinformation, consult your dealer.

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAINSC1030

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAINSC1032

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

CONTINUED

Except DX and Canadian DX-G models

On DX and Canadian DX-G models

U.S. Si model only

Winter Driving Snow Tires

Tire ChainsSummer Tires

TiresM

aintenance

321

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

10/06/23 14:43:31 31SNA650_326

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

The location of the test indicatorwindow varies betweenmanufacturers.

Checking the Battery

Tires, Checking the Battery

322

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Except Si Si

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

10/06/23 14:43:40 31SNA650_327

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio, youmay see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting will be reset to 1:00. To setthe time again, follow the settingprocedure (see page ).

206

207

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles without navigation system

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the BatteryM

aintenance

323

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

10/06/23 14:43:49 31SNA650_328

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.Wash and dry the exterior

completely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Vehicle Storage

324

10/06/23 14:44:01 31SNA650_329

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay closeattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with a 90% water and 10%neutral wool detergent solution.Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth.Remove any dust or dirt on leathersurfaces immediately.

If equipped

Interior Care

Leather

Maintenance

325

10/06/23 14:44:05 31SNA650_330

326

10/06/23 14:44:08 31SNA650_331

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 328....................Changing a Flat Tire . 329

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 334................................Jump Starting . 336

..............If the Engine Overheats . 338.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 340..........Charging System Indicator . 340

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 341...............Brake System Indicator . 342

..............................................Fuses . 343..............................Fuse Locations . 347

......................Emergency Towing . 349

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

327

10/06/23 14:44:12 31SNA650_332

Check the air pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Do not mount tire chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

On vehicles with the TPMSsystem, the low tire pressureindicator comes on and stays onafter you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the compact spare tire, theTPMS indicator comes on and thelow tire pressure indicator goes off.

Do not use a compact spare tiremounted on a front wheel; it willdamage the limited slip differential(see page ).329

On Si model

Compact Spare Tire

328

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

10/06/23 14:44:23 31SNA650_333

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of its well.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

The compact spare tire is smallerthan a standard tire, and it will affectthe vehicle’s handling. Drivecautiously when the spare ismounted on your vehicle.

The size difference may also causedamage to the differential, so do notmount the compact spare on thefront. If either front tire goes flat,remove the rear tire on that sameside, mount the compact spare tireon the rear, then mount the rear tireon the front.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

On Si model only

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

329

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

JACK TOOL CASE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

10/06/23 14:44:35 31SNA650_334

Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.Remove the center cap from the

wheel with the extension.

6. 7.Canadian DX-G model

Changing a Flat Tire

330

JACKING POINTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

10/06/23 14:44:42 31SNA650_335

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

10.8.

9.

DX and U.S. LX models:

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

331

WHEEL NUTS WHEEL COVER

EXTENSION

WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH BRAKE HUB

10/06/23 14:44:52 31SNA650_336

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

13.

11.

12.

14.On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, LX-S, andCanadian SE models


332

CENTER CAP

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

10/06/23 14:45:00 31SNA650_337

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Lower the trunk floor, and closethe trunk lid.

Store the jack and tools in the toolcase. Place the tool case in thecenter of the flat tire.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

15.

16.

17.

18. 19.

20.

21.

272

CONTINUED

On U.S. models


Changing a Tire with TPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

333

WING BOLT SPACERCONE

For normaltire

For sparetire

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

10/06/23 14:45:12 31SNA650_338

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

336

349

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t Start

334

10/06/23 14:45:22 31SNA650_339

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).Are you using a properly coded

key? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

79

322

256

336

343

349Emergency

Towing

Starting theEngine

The Starter Operates Normally

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

335

10/06/23 14:45:32 31SNA650_340

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (manual)or Park (automatic), and set theparking brake.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

You cannot start a vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

1.

2.

Jump Starting

336

Except Si

BOOSTER BATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

10/06/23 14:45:41 31SNA650_341

－＋

＋

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

6.4.

5.

3.

CONTINUED

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

337

Si Except Si Si

BOOSTER BATTERY

10/06/23 14:45:50 31SNA650_342

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

The reading of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

7.

1.

2.

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

If the Engine Overheats

338

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

10/06/23 14:45:59 31SNA650_343

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). Add coolant if the level isbelow the MIN mark.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

7.

8.

9.3.

4.

5.

6.

10.

11.

243

349

349Emergency

TowingEmergency

Towing

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

339

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

10/06/23 14:46:10 31SNA650_344

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.This indicator should never come on

when the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

241

290

349Emergency Towing

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

340

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

10/06/23 14:46:22 31SNA650_345

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).366

Readiness CodesEmissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator LampTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

341

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

10/06/23 14:46:31 31SNA650_346

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. It will stayon if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

300

349Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

342

CanadaU.S.

10/06/23 14:46:40 31SNA650_347

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side, next to the brake fluidreservoir. To open it, push the tabsas shown.

The fuses are in two fuse boxes. Theinterior fuse box is underneath thesteering column.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. The diagram forthe interior driver’s side fuse box ison the kick panel below the fuse box.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

347 348

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

343

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB

FUSE LABEL

10/06/23 14:46:49 31SNA650_348

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

1.

2.

3. 4.

Fuses

344

FUSE PULLER

BLOWNFUSE BLOWN

10/06/23 14:46:58 31SNA650_349

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Your vehicle has spare fuses on theback of the under-hood fuse boxcover.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate that anything is wrong.Replace the fuse with one of thecorrect rating as soon as you can.

5.

CONTINUED

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

345

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

SPARE FUSES

10/06/23 14:47:06 31SNA650_350

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

When the audio system is disabled,the clock setting in the audio systemwill be canceled. You will need toreset the clock (see page ).

6.

207

Fuses

346

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

10/06/23 14:47:11 31SNA650_351

＊

＊

＊

－

－－

－

＊＊

No.

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Amps.

Amps.

CONTINUED

4

567

89

1011121314151617181920212223

1

2

3

Main FuseEPSOption MainIgnition Switch MainABS/VSA MotorABS/VSA F/S

Headlight MainPower Window MainNot UsedSub Fan MotorMain Fan Motor (M/T)Main Fan Motor (A/T)Rear DefoggerBlowerHazardFI SubStop and HornNot UsedNot UsedIGPS Oil LevelNot UsedAudio AmpIG CoilFI MainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

100 A(70 A)60 A50 A30 A30 A40 A

50 A40 A

20 A20 A30 A30 A40 A10 A15 A15 A

7.5 A

(15 A)15 A15 A

7.5 A15 A

7.5 A10 A

1 :2 :

If equippedOn models with VSA system

1

1

2

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

347

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

10/06/23 14:47:21 31SNA650_352

－

－

－－

－

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. No.

No.

Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

Amps. Circuits Protected

:

12345678

910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132333435363738

7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A15 A10 A7.5 A(15 A)(20 A)(7.5 A)

Power WindowFuel PumpAlternatorABS/VSAHeated SeatFront Fog LightTPMSNot Used

ODSMETERSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall Light (Interior)Small Light (Exterior)Right Headlight Low Beam

10 A20 A15 A

20 A

(20 A)20 A20 A

(15 A)15 A20 A

20 A20 A

7.5 A10 A

7.5 A30 A

Left Headlight Low BeamHeadlight High Beam MainSmall Lights (Main)Not UsedHeadlight Low Beam MainNot UsedNot UsedMoonroofDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear Accessory SocketAccessoryPassenger’s Power WindowNot UsedRight Rear Power WindowLeft Rear Power WindowNot UsedAccessory RadioHACDaytime Running LightFront Wiper

If equipped

Fuse Locations

348

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

10/06/23 14:47:32 31SNA650_353

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground.

With the front wheels on the ground,do not tow the vehicle more than 50miles (80 km), and keep the speedbelow 35 mph (55 km/h).

Start the engine.

Release the parking brake.

Shift to the D position and hold for5 seconds, then to N.Turn off the engine.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

CONTINUED

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

Emergency TowingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

349

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

10/06/23 14:47:47 31SNA650_354

Do not tie down the vehicle at anangle that would allow the towingcables to contact the vehicle’s frontbumper. To avoid possible damage,protect the front bumper with tape.

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Emergency Towing

350

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

10/06/23 14:47:53 31SNA650_355

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 352................................Specifications . 354

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 357

.................................Treadwear . 357......................................Traction . 357

.............................Temperature . 358.................................Tire Labeling . 359

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Required

.............Federal Explanation . 361

.......................Emissions Controls . 363.....................The Clean Air Act . 363

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 363

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 363

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 363

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 364....................PGM-FI System . 364

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 364

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 364

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 364

....................Replacement Parts . 364..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 365

........................Emissions Testing . 366

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

351

10/06/23 14:47:57 31SNA650_356

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

The VIN is also located on theengine bulkhead. Slide the cover onthe engine compartment bulkhead toview the VIN. Always close the coverwhen finished.

Identif ication Numbers

352

CERTIFICATION LABEL

COVER

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

10/06/23 14:48:03 31SNA650_357

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

353

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC/MANUALTRANSMISSION NUMBER

Except Si

Si

10/06/23 14:48:09 31SNA650_358

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Specifications

354

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Seating Capacities

177.3 in (4,504 mm)69.0 in (1,752 mm)56.5 in (1,435 mm)106.3 in (2,700 mm)59.0 in (1,499 mm)60.2 in (1,528 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Spark plugs

3.19 x 3.44 in (81.0 x 87.3 mm)3.39 x 3.39 in (86 x 86 mm)

110 cu-in (1,799 cm )122 cu-in (1,998 cm )

10.511.0IZFR6K11SSKJ20DR-M11SIFR7G11KSSK22PR-M11STotal

FrontRear

523

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC i-VTEC , DOHC i-VTEC

4-cylinder gasoline engine

FrontRear

1 :2 :

Except SiSi

NGK:DENSO:

NGK:DENSO:

1

2

1 2

1

2

1

2

2

1

10/06/23 14:48:23 31SNA650_359

－－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－

＊

＊＊＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

355

Air Conditioning

Lights

Capacities

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant oil type

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

SP-10

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 24/2 CP

12 V 21 W12 V 21/5 W12 V 2 CP12 V 21 W12 V 3 CP12 V 21 W

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

1.8 US qt (1.7 )

1.6 US qt (1.5 )

1.19 US gal (4.5 )

1.80 US gal (6.8 )

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

5.8 US qt (5.5 )

6.08 US qt (5.75 )2.5 US qt (2.4 )

1.40 US gal (5.3 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

1.7 US qt (1.6 )

1.5 US qt (1.4 )

1.37 US gal (5.2 )

1.72 US gal (6.5 )

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

3.7 US qt (3.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

13.2 US gal (50 )

Headlights

Front turn signal/side marker/Parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsRear side marker lightsBack-up lightsTaillightsHigh-mount brake lightFog lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk light 12 V

12 V12 V12 V

5 W8 W8 W5 W

12 V 55 W

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Fuel tankEnginecoolant

Engine oil

Manualtransmissionfluid

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

HighLow

A/TM/T

A/TM/T

Change

Total

Approx.

Except Si

ChangeIncluding filter

Without filter

Total

Change

Total

ChangeTotal

(Amber)

(Amber)

(H11)

SiExcept DX, Canadian DX-G

1 :

2 :3 :4 :5 :

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1 3

3

4

3

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

2

4

5

3

10/06/23 14:48:49 31SNA650_360

－

－－－－－－

＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊

Specifications

356

Fuses

Alignment

Battery Tires

P195/65R15 89H

Interior

Under-hood

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 7°24’0°45’0°

0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Capacity 12 V12 V12 V

36 AH/5 HR

38 AH/5 HR45 AH/20 HR

47 AH/20 HR

12 V12 V 38 AH/5 HR

47 AH/20 HR

12 VT135/80R16 101MT125/70D15 95M215/45ZR17 91WP215/45R17 87VP205/55R16 89HP195/65R15 89S

Size

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

T135/80D16 101MSee page 348 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.See page 347 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/Rear

Spare

Front/Rear

Spare

Si (all season tires)

Canadian DX-G with manual transmissionDX, Canadian DX-G with automatic transmission

Except EX-L, Si

1 :2 :3 :4 :5 :6 :7 :8 :9 :

Optional for U.S. Si (summer tires)Si

U.S. EX-LSi, Canadian EX-L

U.S. Vehicles

Canada Vehicles

EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX, Canadian SE

3

1

2

4

5

7

7

6

4, 6

3

1, 2

8, 9

8

10/06/23 14:49:08 31SNA650_361

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)TechnicalInform

ation

357

10/06/23 14:49:18 31SNA650_362

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

358

10/06/23 14:49:23 31SNA650_363

－

－

－－

－

－－

－

－－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer’sidentification mark.Tire type code.Date of manufacture.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).Tire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).Rim diameter in inches.Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

YearWeek

P

55

R

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X2202

205

89

H

CONTINUED

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)Tire Size

Tire LabelingTechnicalInform

ation

359

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)(2)(3)(4)

Tire Size

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire Pressure

(3)

(1)

(1)

(2)(4)

DOT B97R FW6X 2202P205/55R16 89H

10/06/23 14:49:41 31SNA650_364

－

－

－

－

－

－

Cold Tire Pressure The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Maximum Load Rating Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Recommended Inflation PressureThe cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI)Means the projections within theprincipal grooves designed to give avisual indication of the degrees ofwear of the tread.

Maximum Inflation Pressure Themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.

Load Rating Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation pressure.

Tire Labeling

Glossary of Tire Terminology

360

10/06/23 14:49:49 31SNA650_365

－

U.S. models onlyEach tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal ExplanationTechnicalInform

ation

361

10/06/23 14:49:57 31SNA650_366

－

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

362

10/06/23 14:50:04 31SNA650_367

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

363

10/06/23 14:50:13 31SNA650_368

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential

multiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three or four systems:PGM-FI, ignition timing control,exhaust gas recirculation, and threeway catalytic converter. Thesesystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

2

2

Except Si model

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

364

10/06/23 14:50:26 31SNA650_369

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperature

for the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

365

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Except Si model Si model

10/06/23 14:50:36 31SNA650_370

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

366

10/06/23 14:50:46 31SNA650_371

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

367

10/06/23 14:50:51 31SNA650_372

368

10/06/23 14:50:53 31SNA650_373

....Customer Service Information . 370....................Warranty Coverages . 371

.............Reporting Safety Defects . 372.....................Authorized Manuals . 373

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

369

10/06/23 14:50:56 31SNA650_374

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

352

Customer Service Information

370

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.Customer Relations180 Honda BoulevardMarkham, ONL6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: 1-877-939-0909E-Mail: [email protected]

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

10/06/23 14:51:07 31SNA650_375

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe emissions control systems andaccessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2011 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2011 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

371

10/06/23 14:51:19 31SNA650_376

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition tonotifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from .

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may alsoinform Transport Canada.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations andRecalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For moreinformation on reporting safety defects or about motorvehicle safety, go to .

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall andremedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannotbecome involved in individual problems between you,your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects

In the US In Canada

372

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety

10/06/23 14:51:27 31SNA650_377

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)

Authorized ManualsA

uthorizedM

anuals

373

Form Description

2006-2011 Honda Civic 2/4 Door Service Manual

2006-2011 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2006-2011 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Body Repair Manual

2011 Honda Civic 4 Door Owner’s Manual

2011 Honda Civic

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2011 Honda Civic Honda Service History

2011 Honda Civic 4 Door Technology Reference Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate

Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SNA0C

61SNA0CEL

61SNA30

31SNA650

31SNA840

31SNAM50

31SNAQ50

HON-R

www.helminc.com

10/06/23 14:51:37 31SNA650_378

374

10/06/23 14:51:40 31SNA650_379

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 247ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 80.............Accessory Power Socket . 108

..................Active Head Restraints . 96....................Additives, Engine Oil . 291

...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21...Airbags, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

..........Advanced Airbag System . 26.............................Airbag Service . 31



..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 24...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 29

........................SRS Components . 21..............Air Conditioning System . 110

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 315

......................................Antifreeze . 294Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 60, 266...................................Operation . 266

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 206Anti-theft Steering Column

..............................................Lock . 80............................................Armrest . 97

................................Audio System . 114.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 83

.........................Auto Door Locking . 83.....................Auto Door Unlocking . 85

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19.............Automatic Speed Control . 209..............Automatic Transmission . 260

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 355...............Checking Fluid Level . 298

.......................................Shifting . 260Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 260................Shift Lever Positions . 261

....................Shift Lock Release . 263......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 205

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 65, 340............................Jump Starting . 336

..............................Maintenance . 322............................Specifications . 356

..............................Before Driving . 237....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 18

.........................Beverage Holders . 108........HandsFreeLink . 212

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 266

.............Break-in, New Linings . 238....................Bulb Replacement . 305

...........................................Fluid . 300.................Pad Wear Indicators . 265

.......................................Parking . 105.................System Indicator . 59, 342

.............................Braking System . 265.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 238

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 75

Bluetooth

Index

A B

IND

EX

I

10/06/23 14:51:46 31SNA650_380

＊

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 305

..............................Brake Lights . 305........Front Side Marker Lights . 304.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 304

.........................Headlights . 302, 303.........High-mount Brake Light . 307

..........................Parking Lights . 304.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 305..........Rear Turn Signal Lights . 305

............................Specifications . 355..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 302

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 74.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 372

........................Defog and Defrost . 113................Defogger, Rear Window . 76..............Defrosting the Windows . 113

....................................Dimensions . 354...............Dimming the Headlights . 73

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 298

..................................Engine Oil . 241..........................Directional Signals . 73

Disc Brake Pad Wear...................................Indicators . 265

............................Disc Player . 125, 162..................Display Change Button . 66

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 294

.........................................Card, PC . 171............................Capacities Chart . 355

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51.............................Carrying Cargo . 249

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii..............................CD Player . 125, 162

..................................Ceiling Light . 105........................Certification Label . 352

............................................Chains . 321....................Changing a Flat Tire . 329

Changing Oil........................................How to . 292......................................When to . 281

...Charging System Indicator . 65, 340..............Check Fuel Cap Message . 69............Checklist, Before Driving . 255

.....................................Child Safety . 33Child Seats

.............LATCH Anchor System . 42...........................Lower Anchors . 42

................Tether Anchor Points . 45..................Childproof Door Locks . 82

.........................Clock, Setting the . 207...................................Clutch Fluid . 301

........................CO in the Exhaust . 363............Cold Weather, Starting in . 256

..............................Compact Spare . 328.................Console Compartment . 108.................Consumer Information . 370

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55Coolant

........................................Adding . 294....................................Checking . 243

.........................Proper Solution . 294...................Temperature Gauge . 70

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 363

............Cruise Control Operation . 209....Customer Service Information . 370

Index

C

D

II

10/06/23 14:51:52 31SNA650_381

＊

CONTINUED

Doors.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 83

.....................Auto Door Locking . 83.................Auto Door Unlocking . 85

..............Locking and Unlocking . 81......................Power Door Locks . 82

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 357Downshifting, Manual

.............................Transmission . 257...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 253....................................Economy . 244..................................Guidelines . 254

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 310

..............................Economy, Fuel . 244............Emergencies on the Road . 327.............Battery, Jump Starting . 336...........Brake System Indicator . 342

................Changing a Flat Tire . 329.....Charging System Indicator . 340

..................Checking the Fuses . 343.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 340...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 341

..................Overheated Engine . 338.........................Emergency Brake . 105

......................Emergency Flashers . 76......................Emergency Towing . 349

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 89.......................Emissions Controls . 363........................Emissions Testing . 366

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 70

......Engine Speed Limiter . 259, 262Malfunction Indicator

......................................Lamp . 341........Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 340..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 290

...............................Overheating . 338............................Specifications . 354

.......................................Starting . 256......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 238

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 363...............................Exhaust Fumes . 51

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 16

...................................Fan, Interior . 110

.........................................Features . 109....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 239

Filters.........................Dust and Pollen . 310

...............................................Oil . 2925-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 299................................Shifting the . 257

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 329

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 298

..........................................Brake . 300.........................................Clutch . 301

...................................Locations . 288..............Manual Transmission . 299

..........................Power Steering . 301..................Windshield Washer . 297

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 199

........................................Fog Lights . 74...........................Folding Rear Seat . 97..........................Four-way Flashers . 76

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 24

Index

F

E

IND

EX

III

10/06/23 14:51:59 31SNA650_382

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 244.........................................Gasoline . 238

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 64...........................................Gauge . 70

................Octane Requirement . 238........................Tank, Filling the . 239

................Gas Station Procedures . 239Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 70...............................................Fuel . 70

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 260

..............Manual Transmission . 257......................................Glove Box . 108

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 302...........................HandsFreeLink . 212

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76Headlights

........................................Aiming . 302............Daytime Running Lights . 74

..................High Beam Indicator . 61........................Reminder Beeper . 73

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 302...................................Turning on . 73

..............................Head Restraints . 94.............................Heated Mirrors . 104

.....................Heating and Cooling . 110.............High Altitude, Starting at . 256

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 73..............High-mount Brake Light . 307

.......................Hood, Opening the . 240..............................................Horn . 4, 71

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 352Ignition

..............................................Keys . 78

...........................................Switch . 80............Timing Control System . 364

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59

...............................Infant Restraint . 38Infant Seats

.............LATCH Anchor System . 42...........................Lower Anchors . 42

................Tether Anchor Points . 45Inflation, Recommended Tire

...................................Pressures . 315........................Information Display . 67

.................................Inside Mirror . 103.............................Inspection, Tire . 316

............................Instrument Panel . 57................Instrument Panel Lights . 59

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75..............Instruments and Controls . 55

...............................Interior Lights . 105........................................Introduction . i

.......................................iPod . 133, 184

.................................................Fuel . 238......................Fill Door and Cap . 239

...........................................Gauge . 70................Octane Requirement . 238

...............................Oxygenated . 238........................Reserve Indicator . 64

........................Tank, Filling the . 239.....................Fuses, Checking the . 343

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 330.......................................Jack, Tire . 329

Index

H

I

G

J

IV

10/06/23 14:52:07 31SNA650_383

＊

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 78

................................Jump Starting . 336

...................Neutral Gear Position . 261..................New Vehicle Break-in . 238

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 258...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 352

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 238.........................................Odometer . 67

...............................Odometer, Trip . 68Oil

........................Change, How to . 292......................Change, When to . 281......................Checking Engine . 241..............Pressure Indicator . 65, 340

.......Selecting Proper Viscosity . 290...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 80

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 363

............................Outside Mirrors . 104....Outside Temperature Indicator . 68

.......................Label, Certification . 352.................Lane Change, Signaling . 73

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19.................LATCH Anchor System . 42

...........................................Leather . 325Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 302.......................................Indicator . 59

.........................................Parking . 73..................................Turn Signal . 73

....................................Load Limits . 250......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 80

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 80

............................Fuel Fill Door . 239.................................Power Door . 82

...........................................Trunk . 88........................Low Coolant Level . 243

.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 64................................Lower Anchors . 42

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 257...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 340

Low Tire Pressure.............................Indicator . 63, 270

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 355

..................................Maintenance . 279................................Minder . 281-287

.........................Minder Indicator . 65...Owner Maintenance Checks . 286

..........................................Safety . 280.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 341

...................Manual Transmission . 257........Manual Transmission Fluid . 299

...............................Meters, Gauges . 66...................Methanol in Gasoline . 238

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 103.......................................Moonroof . 102

...........................MP3/WMA . 126, 163

Index

M

N

O

K

L

IND

EX

V

10/06/23 14:52:16 31SNA650_384

＊

＊

....................Overheating, Engine . 338....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 286

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 238

..............Panel Brightness Control . 75........................Park Gear Position . 261

...........................................Parking . 264...............................Parking Brake . 105

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 59, 342

.................................Parking Lights . 73..Parking Over Things that Burn . 365

.............................PGM-FI System . 364........................Playing a Disc . 125, 162

.........................Playing a PC Card . 171..................Playing the Radio . 116, 149

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16........................Protecting Children . 33

.....................General Guidelines . 33...........................Protecting Infants . 38

...........Protecting Larger Children . 47

.............Protecting Small Children . 39

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 372

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 52

..............................Safety Messages . iii

...................Radiator Overheating . 338...........Radio/Disc Sound System . 115

Radio/Disc/PC Card/USB............................Sound System . 149...........................Readiness Codes . 341

Rear Lights, Bulb.......................Replacement . 305-307

..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 97..........................Rear View Mirror . 103

.................Rear Window Defogger . 76...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 93

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 258.............................Reminder Lights . 59

................Remote Audio Controls . 204.......................Remote Transmitter . 90

Replacement Information..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 310

................Engine Oil and Filter . 292..........................................Fuses . 343

................................Light Bulbs . 302.............Maintenance Minder . 281

...........................................Tires . 319

.............................Wiper Blades . 311Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 20..........Reporting Safety Defects . 372

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 243, 294

...............................Restraint, Child . 33..................Reverse Gear Position . 261

................................Rotation, Tire . 318

Index

R

S

P

VI

TM

10/06/23 14:52:22 31SNA650_385

＊

CONTINUED

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...............Additional Information . 18

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19........................Maintenance . 20, 309

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 18, 59

...................System Components . 18...............Use During Pregnancy . 16

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14........................Seats, Adjusting the . 93

............................Security System . 208...............................Serial Number . 352

...........................Service Intervals . 281

...........................Service Manual . 373.........Service Station Procedures . 239

..........................Setting the Clock . 207...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 260

........................Shift Lock Release . 263................................Side Airbags . 9, 27

..........................Off Indicator . 30, 60..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 29

Side Marker Lights, Bulb.......................Replacement . 304-305...............................Signaling Turns . 73

.....................................Snow Tires . 321................................Sound System . 114

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 328

............................Specifications . 356....................Specifications Charts . 354

................................Speed Control . 209Speed-sensitive Volume

.......Compensation (SVC) . 119, 160.......................................Spotlights . 106

..........SRS, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

..........Advanced Airbag System . 26.............................Airbag Service . 31



How the SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 29

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 29........................SRS Components . 21

.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 60....START (Ignition Key Position) . 80

.......................Starting the Engine . 256In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 256................With a Dead Battery . 336

........Steam Coming from Engine . 338Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 77.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 80

...................Stereo Sound System . 114....................Storing Your Vehicle . 324

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 21......................................Servicing . 31

.........................SRS Indicator . 29, 60...................System Components . 21

.........................................SVC . 119, 160..................................Synthetic Oil . 291

Taillights, Changing...................................Bulbs . 305-306

Index

T

IND

EX

VII

10/06/23 14:52:28 31SNA650_386

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

................................Vanity Mirror . 107.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 250

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 354....Vehicle Identification Number . 352

.............................Vehicle Storage . 324.................................................VIN . 352

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 291

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 327Technical Descriptions

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 357.....Emissions Control Systems . 363

....................Emissions Testing . 366.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 238

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 364

.................................Tire Labeling . 359.......................Temperature Gauge . 70.....................Tether Anchor Points . 45

............................Theft Protection . 208..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 365

..........................Time, Setting the . 207....................................Tire Chains . 321

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 329.........................Tire Information . 357

Tire Pressure Monitoring System................................(TPMS) . 270

.............................Indicator . 63, 271Required Federal

..........................Explanation . 361...............................................Tires . 314

..............................Air Pressure . 315.........................Checking Wear . 316..........................Compact Spare . 328

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 357..................High Speed Driving . 316

......................................Inflation . 314..................................Inspection . 316

..............................Maintenance . 318...................................Replacing . 319

......................................Rotating . 318................................Service Life . 317

...........................................Snow . 321....................Specifications . 320, 356

................................Tire Chains . 321...................Tools, Tire Changing . 329

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 273

..................Emergency Towing . 349...........................Traction Devices . 321

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 298Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 299..................Fluid Selection . 298, 299

..............Identification Number . 352.............Shifting the Automatic . 260

..................Shifting the Manual . 257...................................Treadwear . 357

.......................................Trip Meter . 68................................................Trunk . 88

........................................Opening . 88...................Open Monitor Light . 61

....................................Turn Signals . 73

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 327

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 357........................Unleaded Gasoline . 238

USB Adapter..................Cable . 135, 144, 186, 194

.USB Flash Memory Device . 141, 191.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 294

Index

U

V

VIII

10/06/23 14:52:35 31SNA650_387

＊

.............................XM Radio . 120, 153

Vehicle Stability Assist.....................(VSA ) System . 268

............Activation Indicator . 62, 268..................................Off Switch . 269

.................System Indicator . 62, 268

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 52

....................Warranty Coverages . 371Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 297.......................................Indicator . 64.....................................Operation . 72

.............................................Wheel . 313...............Adjusting the Steering . 77............Alignment and Balance . 318

..........................Compact Spare . 328...............................Nut Wrench . 330

Windows................Operating the Power . 101

...........................Rear, Defogger . 76Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 72...................................Defroster . 113

.......................................Washers . 72Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 311.....................................Operation . 72

............................Worn Tires . 316, 317.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 349

:U.S. only

IndexIN

DE

X

WX

IX

10/06/23 14:52:40 31SNA650_388

Service Information Summary

Automatic Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid:Gasoline:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Recommended Engine Oil:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Except Si

Si

Except Si

Si

Except Si

Si

All models except Si andCanadian DX-G (M/T)

DX, Canadian DX-G

Si

EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX,Canadian SE

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

API Premium grade 5W-30detergent oil (see page ).

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )Spare Tire:

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher recommended (see ‘‘FuelRecommendations’’ on page ).

13.2 US gal (50 )

Honda ATF DW-1 (automatictransmission fluid) (see page ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity (including differential):

1.5 US qt (1.4 )

1.6 US qt (1.5 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

238

291

291

300

298

299

301

10/06/23 14:52:59 31SNA650_389

Documents

2011 CIVIC SEDAN